hệ thống kích từ trong nhà máy thủy điện

EXC9000 STATIC EXCITATION
SYSTEM
USERS MANUAL
GUANGZHOU ELECTRICAL APARATUS

RESEARCH INSTITUTE
Users guideBrief introduction
Chapter 1 Brief introduction

Preword ..................................................................................... 2
Chapter 1 Brief introduction ................................................... 4
Chapter 2 System composition ................................................ 4
Chapter 3 Regulating software Function Illustrations .......... 4
Chapter 4 Human-machine interface...................................... 4
Chapter 5 Regulation software ................................................ 5
Chapter 6 Installation guide .................................................... 5
Chapter 7 Commissioning........................................................ 5
Chapter 8 Operation................................................................. 5
Chapter 9 Maintenance and trouble shooting........................ 6
Chapter 10 Communication with the SCADA system........... 6
Chapter 11 Electronic braking function ................................. 6
Chapter12 Regulator model and logic control ....................... 6
1-1
Preword
EXC9000 total-digital excitation system is the 4th generation of micro-computer
excitation system, developed by Guangzhou electric Aparatus Institute/ Gunagzhou
KINTE ELECTRIC CONTROL CO.LTD. EXC9000 is characterized mainly by
function software & system digitization. Digitization of EXC9000 system shows not
only in regulator, but also in rectifier cubicle and de-excitation cubicle. Intelligent
detecting, intelligent display, intelligent control, information intelligent transmission
and intelligent testing can be realized in various parts of the excitation system, which
greatly improves its reliability and techniques.
This system absorbs advanced research findings and techniques in the current
digital control area in addition to novel extricate solutions such as DSP digital signal
processing, controlled silicon commutator automatic balancing technique ,
high-frequency pulse array triggering technique, low voltage residual quick flashing
technique, complete communication function and intelligentized regulation method
etc. The BUS technique is also used to control and exchange information in different
parts of the excitation system, which makes the system an organic and complete one.
The EXC9000 excitation system has 3 independent channels
(digital/digital/analogue) and 2 different sets of regulation mode. Each regulatory
channel has an independently intelligent fault detection system.
The regulator
adopts multi-CPU mode for co-ordination, with the advantage of rationally devided
work, fast computation and low power waste.
It can run in an entirely closed
environment, without fans for heat elimination. The adoption of needle-hole linker,
which is made according to the European standard for its structure and size with high
density, ensures the system a strong resistance against striking and vibration.
Averagedly, the regulator can keep working without problems for 17 years.
The
human-machine interface takes up the integral flat links, which has a multi-course
3-dimentioned Chinese display. Not only can it be used to show the working status of
the system but also it can be employed as the rugulation tool for intelligent rugulation.
Its various outlet interface plus the simple and practical communication agreement
1-2

makes it accessible to different monitoring systems. In its circuit design and the
technological structure, there are various anti-interruption measures. In this way, the
regulator give full play to the functions of screening, ground connecting, wave sifting
and lines spread design. As a result, besides the low fault rate, the regulater also
passes the national laboratory eletromagnetism compatibility test.
The main characteristics of our rectifier are the high output current, strong wind
stopping fan and intelligenization. More than 400 rectifiers with a rated output current
as large as 2000A are spreading in more than 100 power plants all over China. The
first one was in-services 8 years ago.
Associated with the 3-gorges sub-topic of
study on the large-scale excitation rectifier , our institute had also produced the
rectifier with the output current as large as 3000A in the year 2001.
The intelligent rectifier realizes the functions of intelligent working status test, the
intelligent working display, intelligent information transmission, intelligent cubicle
exit, intelligent current balancing and so on. The intelligent proposal provides an all
around monitor for the rectifier, which greatly simplifies the operational circuit.
Any
signal for fault error or status signal can be sent out through the BUS. Intelligent
current balancing is a pirate technique of out institute. When adopted, the technique
would ensure a coefficient more than 97% in the parallel rectifiers.
Inside the de-excitation system, the intelligent control system is also adopted. The
conventional gauges and indicator lights are all discarded. The operation, control,
status monitoring, information transmission, information display and tests are all
intelligenized.
Considering the innovation needs and habits of some power plants, we also came
up with the design proposal for the EXC9000 regulator working with the conventional
rectifier and de-excitation system . In this way, the requirements of the power plants
who just reform the regulators are met.
This book users guide is compiled for the end of an elaboration on the system
including the meathods for type choosing, hard ware strcture and functions,
installation, regulation and maintenance of the equipment as well as ways to handle
errors for the users, so as to better make use of and maintain this system.
1-3
Chapter 1 Brief introduction

This chapter mainly concerns about the main characteristics of the EXC9000
system, and the content of this book
For: those who have no knowledge of this system and get in first touch with it.
Chapter 2 System composition

This chapter contains
(1) Types standard of EXC9000
(2) Rationale diagram of EXC9000
(3) Components and functions of the excitation regulator
(4) Components and functions of the excitation rectifier
(5) Components and functions of the de-excitater and over-voltage protection unit
(6) Components and functions of the fieldflashing unit
(7) External PT, CT measuring units and its functions
(8) Structure design of EXC9000.
For: purchasers, power plant designer, and installers of electrimachine, operators
and the technicians for maintenance.
Chapter 3 Regulating software Function Illustrations

This chapter contains:
The software function illustration and the logic control diagram for this excitation
system.
For: power plant designer, and installers of electrimachine, operators and the
technicians for maintenance.
Chapter 4 Human-machine interface

(1) HMI for regulator
the explanation of functional parameters, operation of keys, and matters needed
attention
(2) HMI for rectifier
1-4

the explanation of functional parameters, operation of keys, and matters needed
attention
(3) HMI for de-excitation
The explanation of functional parameters, operation of keys, and matters needed
attention
For: installers of electrimachine, operators and the technicians for maintenance.
Chapter 5 Regulation software

(1) Operation of the commissioning software
Including: the installation of regulation software, connection of the communication
interface, start up of the commissioning software and ways to communicate between
the upper and lower machine, as well as the different function units.
(2) Online modification of parameters and matters needed attention
(3) Explanation on meanings of parameter set in the regulator
For: installers of electrimachine, operators and the technicians for maintenance.
Chapter 6 Installation guide

This chapter includes:
The storage, transportation and installation of the system
For: power plant designer, and installers of electrimachine, and the technicians for
maintenance.
Chapter 7 Commissioning
Out-of-factory commissioning scheme for EXC9000 system
Site commissioning scheme for EXC9000 system
For: installers of electrimachine, operators, and the technicians for maintenance.
Chapter 8
Operation

Operation steps in startup and shutdown as well as generating.
1-5

Measure for emergency.
For: power plant designer, operators and the technicians for maintenance.
Chapter 9 Maintenance and trouble shooting

The maitenence scheme for the equipment
Judgement and measures for handling errors and abnormalty
For: operators and technicians for maintenance.
Chapter 10 Communication with the SCADA system

Communication agreement of the system
Connecting mode of the communication interface and the monitoring system
Chapter 11 Electronic braking function

The rationale and wiring mode of the electric braking function
Working procedure of this function
Chapter12 Regulator model and logic control

This chapter contans:
Digital mode of automatic voltage (AVR) and logic control of power system
stability.(PSS)
Controll of limitation, regulation, fault.
1-6
Users guideSystem composition
Chapter 2
System composition
1. Models & Specifications ....................................................... 5

2. System Block Diagram ......................................................... 7
3. Regulator.. 8
3.1Regulating channels .................................................................. 8
3.2 Hardware of regulators........................................................... 10
3.2.1 Block diagram of hardware....................................................10
3.2.2 Automatic channel (A/B channel)..........................................10
3.2.3 Main CPU Board....................................................................12
3.2.3.1 main functions.................................................................12
3.2.3.2 main components and technique Specifications .............12
3.2.3.3 the definition and function of jumper and linker ............13
3.2.3.4 Precaution........................................................................15
3.2.4 DSP Board..............................................................................15
3.2.4.1 main functions.................................................................16
3.2.4.2. Characteristics and technique indicator .........................16
3.2.4.3 Functional definition of linkers and indicator lights.......17
3.2.5 I/O Board................................................................................19
3.2.5.1 Main functions ................................................................19
3.2.5.2 main characteristics and technical indicators..................20
3.2.5.3 definition of linkers and indicators .................................21
2-1
3.2.6 Analogue quantity board ........................................................24

3.2.6.1 Main functions ................................................................24
3.2.6.2 Manual Channel C ..........................................................24
3.2.6.3 Definition of ports and linkers in the analogue quantity
BUS board...................................................................................28
3.2.7 Switch quantity BUS board ...................................................32
3.2.7.1 Main functions ................................................................32
3.2.7.2 definition for wiring terminal and linkers on the switch
quantity BUS board.....................................................................33
3.2.8 LOU Board.............................................................................41
3.2.8.1 Main functions ................................................................41
3.2.8.2 Definition of the wiring terminals and linkers................42
3.2.9 Intelligent IO board ................................................................44
3.2.9.1 Main functions ................................................................44
3.2.9.2 Definition for wiring terminals and linkers on the IO
board............................................................................................45
3.2.10 The human-machine interface in the regulator ---color liquid
crystal touch screen .........................................................................48
3.2.10.1 main functions...............................................................48
3.2.10.2 operation........................................................................48
3.3 Power supply.......................................................................... 48
4 Rectifier cubicle.................................................................... 49
2-2
4.1 Working mode of rectifier cubicle.......................................... 49

4.2 The major components of each rectifier cubicle..................... 50
4.3 Intelligent rectifier cubicle ..................................................... 50
4.3.1 intelligent control board of rectifier cubicle ..........................51
4.3.1.1 Main functions ................................................................51
4.3.1.2 definition of wiring terminal and linkers on the rectifier
cubicle .........................................................................................51
4.3.2 Definition of the wiring terminals and linkers of impulse
board................................................................................................57
4.3.3 control of the intelligent rectifier cubicle .............................57
4.4 Pulse formation ...................................................................... 59

4.5 intelligent current balancing................................................... 60
4.6 Pulse transformer.................................................................... 61
4.7 Long-distance transmission of pulse ...................................... 61
4.8 R-C protection ........................................................................ 61
4.9 Conventional rectifier cubicle ................................................ 62
5. De-excitation and overvoltage protection ......................... 63

5.1 Block diagram of de-excitation and overvoltage protection
circuit ........................................................................................... 63
5.2 Allocation of the de-excitation cubicle................................... 65
5.3 Intelligent de-excitation cubicle ............................................. 65
5.3.1 the controlling board for intelligent de-excitation .................65
2-3
5.3.1.1 Definition for the wiring terminal and linkers on this

board............................................................................................66
5.3.2 Intelligent functions ...............................................................70
5.3.3 measurement of the rotor temperature ...................................70
5.3.4 crowbar...................................................................................71
5.3.4.1 the operation principle of crowbar..................................71
5.3.4.2 Definition for wiring terminal and linkers on Crowbar..72
5.3.5 DC transducer board for de-excitater.....................................73
5.3.5.1 Main functions ................................................................73
5.3.5.2 Definition for DC transducer wiring terminal and linkers
.....................................................................................................74
5.5 Conventional de-exciter ......................................................... 75
6. Flashing unit........................................................................ 76
7. External testing units of PT, CT ........................................ 77
8. Design of structure.............................................................. 78
8.1 cubicle structure ..................................................................... 78
8.2 Protection scale ...................................................................... 78
8.3 Surface coating....................................................................... 78
8.4 Doorknobs .............................................................................. 79
8.5 Main circuit ............................................................................ 79
8.6 Conducting wire ..................................................................... 79
8.7 Wire sizes of the conducting wire .......................................... 79
2-4
8.9 Grade of conducting wire ....................................................... 79
1. Models & Specifications

FJL
G A L S P A D E
[1]: Number of excitation cubicles

[2]: Models of regulators
ADLT4000
BDLT6000 (auto/manual channel)
CDLT6000 (double manual channels)
FLTW6200
GEXC9000
[3]: Combinations of regulating channels
Osingle channel (with manual operating function)
Tauto/manual double channels
Dtwo auto channels
Atwo auto channels and one manual channel
[4]Human-machine Interface
LLCD display
Cindustrial controller
IIntelligent Operation Screen
[5]: Flexible Electric Braking
No such function
Sself & shunt excitation wiring, needs independent braking transformer
AExternal wiring, no special braking transformer
[6]: Rectifier redundancy mode
S Single rectifier with no redundancy
R-Cool standby
PParallel working
2-5

[7]: Cooling of rectifier
ASolid-core aluminium radiator
HHeat pipe radiator
WWater cooling
[8]: De-excitation mode
AAC de-excitation
DDC de-excitation
RRedundancy de-excitation
[9]: Models of rectifier cubicle
Code
Rates Output excitation Force

Current
output No. of commuters
excitation
Current
600A
1200A
Full-controlled
single bridge
1200A
2400A
full-controlleddouble bridges
800A
1600A
full-controlledsingle bridge
1000A
2000A
2000A
4000A
4000A
X
[10]: No. of
rectifier cubicles
[11]: Modes of de-excitation resistor

Alinear resistor
Bnon-linear resistor
XOther modes
Generally speaking, static self & shunt excitation system equipped with large and
medium sized generator is composed as shown in the following box.
Name
No.
Size (WDH)(mm)
2-6
Basic Description

Regulator
1 Unit 80010002260 or
8008002260
3-channel,2-BUS, intelligent
detecting
intelligent
interface color
LCD
touching screen
Rectifier
2~4
8008002260
1000A
Intelligent local
cubicle
Units
80010002260
2000A
BUS
100012002260
4000A
Field
circuit 1 Unit 80010002260
Field
circuit
breaker,
breaker
De-excitation
control
cubicle
circuit excitation starting

unit, outlet BUS bar
Non-linear
1 Unit 80010002260
cubicle
High-capacity
resistors,
non-linear
crystal
tube
epoxy
dry
flyover
Excitation
1 Set
3-phase
Transformer
transformer or transforming
set
2. System Block Diagram

As is shown in the diagram, EXC9000 system is composed of regulator,
Human-machine interface, external interface, rectifier cubicle, de-excitation and
over-voltage protection and excitation transformer etc.
2-7

T02
U AUX.
U BATT.
Q02
Q90
AC AUX. BUS
AC BUS
F05
EXCITATION
TRANSFORMER
Q80
DC BUS
T05
SA01
VI01
DC24V BUS
SA02
VI02
A/D
R03
D/A
G34
Channel A
V03
G33
G32
DSP
CPU
900A
I/O
G31
DSP
CPU
900N
900E
900M
900H
900A
I/O
F02
LCD
900K
Channel B
900P
Q03
QFG
R02
Channel C
900C
PULSE BUS
LCD
900J
LCD
900K
CANBUS
IPC
900I
900G
GS
The whole set of data exchange in the excitation system realized through the local
CAN BUS, following are the station numbers of CAN BUS:
Hardware
No.
of
Channel
Channel
L.O.U.
Industrial
Intelligent
1#
2#
3#
4#
Controller
I/O
Rectifier
rectifier
rectifier
rectifier
cubicle
cubicle
cubicle
cubicle
De-exciter
10
CHA
CHB
LOU
IPC
IIU
REC1
REC2
REC3
REC4
FCB
station
Code
Name
3. Regulator
3.1Regulating channels
The EXC9000 excitation regulator is a 3-channel regulator, The A/B channel is
microcomputer channel, its core controlling part is the 32-digit BUS controller, and
Channel C as the analogue channel. Channel A is the main channel; measuring signals
are obtained through the 1st set of voltage (PT1) and current mutual inducers (CT1)
2-8

BV1 &BA1 at the generator terminals. Channel B is the 1st standby channel;
measuring signals are obtained through the 2st set of voltage (PT2) and current mutual
inducers (CT2) BV2 &BA2. The synchronous voltage signal collected from the
secondary side of the excitation transformer is for use of the 3 channels. So it is with
the excitation current from the current transformer on the secondary side of the
excitation transformer.
Microcomputer/microcomputer/analogue
3-channel
and
2-mode
redundant
structure is used which is composed of two automatic voltage-regulating channels (A

& B) and one manual-regulating channel (C). The three channels are entirely
independent each other from measuring circuit to pulse output circuit. The
regulating channels work under the principle of main-auxiliary mode. The normal
mode is that Channel A is the operating channel, Channel B is the standby channel,
with channel B and C automatically tracking channel A.
Both channel B and
Channel C can be chosen to be the standby channel, with channel B being the first
choice. In case theres anything wrong with channel A, it is automatically
switched to the standby channels.
following the operating channel.
Channel C is all the time automatically

It is the same with channel B when it has
something wrong, channel C would be automatically switched to for operation.

The relation of the three channels is as the following:
ABUS
KBUS
Collocation of Regulating Channels
2-9
3.2 Hardware of regulators

3.2.1 Block diagram of hardware
As is shown in the following diagram, the regulator is composed of regulating
channels A, B and C, analogue quantity BUS board, switch quantity BUS board,
Human-machine interface, interface circuit etc. The hardware are:
The A, B automatic channels with each containing:
One CPU board
One DSP measuring board
One I/O board
One digital quantity BUS interface board

One analogue quantity BUS interface board(C Channel included)
One L.O.U. board
One set of Human-machine interface
One intelligent I/O board and corresponding relay output board
900E
900H
900J
LCD
CAN BUS
900A
C
900C
900A
A
DSP
5468
CPU
5094
I/O
900I
B
I/O
D/A
CAN
5432
DSP
5468
CPU
5094
I/O
D/A
CAN
5432
900G
COMPACT PCI
COMPACT PCI
Diagram Hardware of the regulator
3.2.2 Automatic channel (A/B channel)

A/B Channel is a microcomputer excitation regulator, adapting multi-CPU
hardware mode, in which several CPU work together with different divisions of work.
Mainly the Intel series CPU multi-CPU mode is in use. It is fit to be the core
2-10

processor with its high processing capacity, more external interface resources, ample
surrounding supporting software and hardware and simple programming. Taking
advantages of this mode, we make it as the core processor, to finish the regulatory
control.
DSP chip has huge timing capacity to process large quantity of data, which is quite
fit, for sampling and processing of data. It is mainly used to realize synchronized
collection and high-speed switching of input of 34-line analogue quantity and output
of 16-bit digital quantity.
Independent error testing is available by SCM set in each of the channel, so as to
avoid the problem of inability to self-test when theres something wrong with the
automatic channel. In this way, the security level is raised.
Automatic channel hardware block diagram is as follows.
900E
900H
900A
DSP
5468
CPU
5094
I/O
D/A
CAN
5432
COMPACT PCI
Automatic Channel Hardware Block Diagram

Core parts in automatic channel are internal BUS industrial controller, in which
three panels are inserted:
CPU board, a highly integrated single-panel computer that, with all functions
of an industrial computer and core part as 486DX5-133, is fit for embedding
use.
DSP board , realizing synchronized collection and high-speed switching of
input of 34-line analogue quantity and output of 16-bit digital quantity. This
2-11

panel, with DSP chip as the intelligent component, can realize the in -phase
AC sampling technique per cycle in 32-point vector and the method of phase
shift. The main CPU can read at any time collection or calculation results
through 16-digit double-interface RAM chip.
I/O board, a multi-functional I/O panel that provides output of 4-line
analogue quantity, input of 32-line switch quantity (including 24-line optical
separation input+8-line TTL electric level input), output channel of 24-line
switch quantity (including 8-line optical separation output + 16-line TTL
electric level output) and CANBUS interface.
3.2.3 Main CPU Board

The main CPU Board is a single-panel computer of high compact, with all
functions of other ordinary computers, suitable for embedded use.
3.2.3.1 main functions

(1) Regulatory function: preset the quota, AVR Regulator (PID+PSS),
FCR Regulator, deviation, constant reactive regulation /power factor regulation, soft
excitation starting, channel tracking, system voltage tracking, ect.
(2) Limitation function: V/F limitation, force excitation limitation, over excitation
limitation, under excitation limitation, stator current limitation, ect.
(3) Other functions: online data modification, record wave of errors, and error
prevention in operation.
3.2.3.2 main components and technique Specifications

486DX5-133 CPU
APCI BUS interface
DOS interface
FLASH E-disk
4KB EEPROM
A RS232 serial and a RS232/422/485 serial
RJ 45 Ethernet interface
2-12

PC104 linker
Watchdog timer, which can restore the system
Source voltage +5V(5.0V-5.25V) , source power consumption +5V@4A
3.2.3.3 the definition and function of jumper and linker

(1) Serial port
CPU provides for 4 serial communication interfaces, 2 of which, namely, COM1
(CN22) & COM2 (CN23), are D89-cable sockets, introduced through the board.
COM1 is used to connect the computer, while COM 2 is not used in the regulation.
Following is the pin definition of COM1 .
COM1 (CN22)
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
(2) Jumper and linker
SIGNAL
DCD1
RXD1
TXD1
DTR1
CND1
PIN
6
7
8
9
SIGNAL
DSR1
RTS1
CTS1
RI1
Jumper
Functions
JP1
Com4 Activating jumper
JP2
Com3 Activating jumper
JP5
LCD SHF/ASHF Timer choose
JP8
LCD Voltage choose
JP3, JP4
COM3 Setup for mode choose
JP6, JP7
COM4 Setup for mode choose
JP9
EEPROM Write-protect jumper
JP10, JP11
E-disk setup
JP13
E-disk chip (FLASH OR EPROM) jumper
JP12
CPLD Programming linker, users impassable
JP14
CMOS clear jumper
2-13
Liner
Functions
CN1
Power supply linker
CN2
Frontpage board linker
CN3
Ethernet Linker
CN4
VGA and printer linker
CN5
Io interface for users, linking COM3, 4,LCD, VGA, ect.
CN6
LCD Linker (Plain cable)
CFD1
CF slot
CN7
Hard disk linker
CN8
AT96 BUS interface
CN9
PC104 linker
SW1
Restoring switch
CN11
Digital I/O linker
CN10
Infrared linker
CN12
Soft-disk driver linker
CN14
PS/2 keyboard and mouse linker PS2
CN13
Power LED & keyboard lock
CN15
COM1, 2 linker (D headed)
CN16
USB linker
U49&U45
E-disk PLCC socket able to support 32 footed flash or EPROM chip in

which U71 being the first one, the socket for system disk.
(3) Setup for out-of-factory

Jumper
Setup For output
Explanation
JP1
1-2 Shot linkage
Active COM4
JP2
1-2 Shot linkage
Active COM3
JP3
1-2 Shot linkage
JP4
1-3,7-9,2-4,8-10,Shotlinkage
JP5
1-2 Shot linkage
Set COM3 as RS-232
2-14
LCD TIMER CONTROL

JP6
1-2 Shot linkage
JP7
1-3,7-9,2-4,8-10Shotlinkage
JP8
2-3 Shot linkage
SET COM4 AS RS-232

LCD
DRIVING
VOLTAGE 3.3V
JP9
1-2 Shot linkage
EPROM
WRITE-PROTECT
(NORMAL)
JP10
2-3 Shot linkage
Am 486DX5-133
JP11
No shot linkage
Active E-disk
JP13
1-2,3-4 shot linkage
1MB FLASH
JP14
1-2 shot linkage
No deletion of CMOS
setup
(4) Application procedure

The application procedure in main CPU board is written into the flash chip labeled
flash1 and flash2 by the programming machine,
flash 1 chip inserted into Slot
U49 and flash2 chip into Slot U52.

(5) Indicator light and restoration button
On the front of CPU board theres a 5V-power indicator light and a restoring button.
The restoring button can restore the main CPU Board and its system.
3.2.3.4 Precaution
ATTENTION: before contacting the CPU board, one should touch the ground so
as to eliminate static. Electronic apparatus are sensitive to static.
Use a static ring
all the time and put the board in the static-shield bag when it is not used.
3.2.4 DSP Board

This is a special intelligent DSP A/D data collection board, realizing 34-line input
data and high-speed switch with 16-figure output.
This board adopts the DSP chip
as the core component, realizing a 32-piont vector simultaneous AC sample taking

and handling with the arithmatics of window shift.
collected by DSP board through a RAM chip.
2-15
Main CPU can read the data
By making use of the digital and

mimic short linkage, the board is able to get the most accurate result possible.
The 32 point vector simultaneous AC sampling and processing by the arithmetic of
window mobile , which is developed by our company, overcome the problems of long
period of time for sampling phenomenally reducing the time for regulator
measurement, increasing the ability of rapid regulation.

(1) Data collecting
Generator terminal PT, generator terminal CT, system PT, excitation transformer
secondary volts CT, PSS testing signal (V1-V4)
(2) Data computation
Generator voltage, generator current, system voltage, excitation current, voltage
frequency, power, reactive power;
(3) Data transmit
Store the above data into RAM, for the CPU to deploy
3.2.4.2. Characteristics and technique indicator

DSP processor: TMS320VC33-120
Program storage inside the board : 128K8bit EPROM
Main CPU and DSP can require quit to each other with flexible and
convenient handshake signals
With the watchdog function, refresh time 150 ms , 600 ms, 1200 ms , selected
through the jumper
Within the board theres steady voltage equipment , the users prepare a +5V
and 12V power supply.
A/D transmitter:
resolution :16 bit

Output code: binary system
Time for transmission in single channel : 15s
No. of channels: single port 34 line
Mimic signal input : 5V
-filtering electrical circuit on board
2-16

Single channel gathering frequency:
500KHz
Multi-channel simultaneous collection frequency:

330K/amount of channels (12figured accuracy, setup time 3Us)
200K/amount of channels (16figured accuracy, setup time 5 Us)
Total error : 0.005%FSR
Power consumption: 340m A @+5V
140m A @+12V ;140m A @-12V
3.2.4.3 Functional definition of linkers and indicator lights

(1) Linkers on DSP board (out of factory setup)
Jumper
Output setup
Explanation
W1
2-3 Shot linkage
No written in (EPRO M)
W2
1-2 Shot linkage
Serial EEPROM is normal mode
W3
2-3 Shot linkage
The H3 signal automatically clear

watchdogs overflow in DSP
W4
Open
Time for watchdog overflow 600ms
W7
3-4, 7-8, 11-12, SHORT LINKAGE
The I/O base address is 150H in

output
W8
1-2 SHORT LINKAGE
W9
1-2,
5-6,
7-8,
Setup as HALT 10
11-12SHORT The
LINKAGE
RAM
address
setup
as
D2000-D2FFFH
(2) Definition for 20 cored plain cable linked to analogue quantity bus board
EXC900E3
Cable NO.
Code name
Channel NO.
RAM
Definition
address
1
UA1
CH0
0000
Pot A with PT
voltage
UB2
CH1
0002
Pot B with PT
voltage
UC1
CH2
0004
2-17
Pot C with PT

voltage
4
IA
CH3
0006
Current
from
power generator A
5
IB
CH4
0008
Current
from
power generator B
6
IC
CH5
000A
Current
from
power generator C
7
US
CH6
000C
System
PT
voltage
8
IL
CH7
000E
Excitation
electronic current
V1
CH8
0010
Standby A/D
10
V2
CH9
0012
Standby A/D
11
V3
CH10
0014
Standby A/D
12
V4
CH11
0016
In-phase voltage
13
UKA
CH12
0018
Control
signal
UKA
14
UKB
CH13
001A
Control
signal
UKB
15
UKC
CH14
001C
Control
signal
UKC
16
UAB
CH15
001E
Port
voltage
frequency
17
GND
Power and signal

spot
18
-12V
-12V Power
19
+12V
+12V Power
20
+12V
+12V Power
(3) Application programs
2-18

Programs of DSP are written into Chip EPROM, and the Chip EPROM can be
inserted to the first socket U3 on the top left of DSP board.
(4) Definition of the indicator lights on DSP board
Director light NO.
Function
L1
ON if
L2
ON if the frequency is below 35HZ
L3
ON if the frequency is above 35HZ
L4
twist
L5
ON if sample and compute
connected to power
3.2.5 I/O Board

This is a multi-functional I/O board in accordance with the AT96 BUS regulation. It
supplies 4-line mimic output, 32-line switch quantity input (including 24-line input
and 8-lline TTL input), 24-line switch quantity output (including 8-line output
+16-line TTL output) channel and CAN BUS communicative interface.
3.2.5.1 Main functions

(1) Receive the control direction to the regulator
Increase or decrease of excitation, field flashing, inversion, interconnection, PSS
on etc..
(2) Realize the communication between the regulator and Local CANBUS
Connect the regulator and CAN BUS, realizing the data exchange between
regulator and LOU, intelligent IO as well as the interface of human-machine.
(3) The output signal for error in the regulator
PT error, synchronic error, watchdog signals, ect.
(4) The output signal of the digital impulse
Export digital impulsion signals to digital quantity BUS, producing 6 phase
impulsive signal.
2-19
3.2.5.2 main characteristics and technical indicators

32-line switch quantity input (including 24-line input and 8-line TTL input),
24-line switch quantity output (including 8-line output +16-line TTL output)
channel
CAN BUS communicative interface
Analogue quantity output
Channels: 4 lines
Resolution factor: 12- figured
Automatic Clear up once connected with power, reservation for data in

warm start
Output: 0-10v
Established time: 30u S
Exchange accuracy: 0.3%FSR
Driving ability for output voltage: +5m A

digital quantity output
Light isolation output channels: 8 lines

TTL output channels: 16 lines
Light isolation output low electrical level :VOL =0~0.4 V
Light isolation output high electrical level: VOH =24V
Isolated voltage: 2500VDC
Frequency for output signals: 20KHZ Square wave being
the highest ( 50% vacant)
Light isolation Input loaded electric current: Single line being the
highest 80m A
Switch quantity input
Light isolation input channels : 24 lines
TTL input channels: 8 lines
Light isolation input low electrical level :VOL =0~0.4 V
Light isolation input high electrical level: VOH =24V
2-20
Input electric resistance: 4.7K

Isolated voltage: 2500VDC
Frequency for input signals: 20KHZ Square wave being the highest
(50% vacant)
3.2.5.3 definition of linkers and indicators

(1) Linker on I/O board
JUMPER
OUTPUT SETUP
EXPLANATION
W1
1-2 break
No
connection
with
the
CAN
terminal resistance
W2
1-3short linkage, or all break
W3
1-2,7-8,9-10,11-12
No usage of the breaking function
short Set the base address as 180H
linkage
(2) Definition of the 40-core plain cable linking the I/O board and digital quantity
EXC900H3
2-21

Functions
Definition
Line
Increase excitation
R607
(R613)
SFC start
BIN1
Definition
Functions
R611
Decrease
(R617)
excitation
BIN2
Oscilloscope
trigger
PSS on
Electric
R692
braking N01
R652
Interconnection
N02
Back
excitation on
to
back
generator
Start command
R651
10
R653
Stop command
Back to back motor
N03
11
12
Test A/B
Program change
Channel address
GND
13
14
COMA
Channel
Operation
channel B operation
COMB
15
16
COMC
Channel
Operation
Changeover to auto
N04
17
18
Y47
Rise from zero
Channel tracing on
R695
19
20
R696
System tracing on
Commissioning
SW0
21
22
SW1
Commissioning
Testing
MANA
23
24
R671
Impulse error
PT error
PTB
25
26
R631
10% Ug
40% Ug
R632
27
28
WDOG
Error testing
29
30
Synchronic
error R28
and magnetism loss

CAN BUS +
CAN+
31
32
CAN-
CAN BUS -
D/A channel 0
DA0
33
34
DA1
D/A channel 1
D/A channel 2
DA2
35
36
DA3
D/A channel 3
DC24V+
R601
37
38
R601
DC24V+
DC24V-
R602
39
40
R602
DC24V-
2-22
(3) Definition of the 20-CORE plain cable linking the I/O board and digital
quantity EXC900H3
Functions
Definition
Line
Definition
Functions
182.3
182.0
Lock
Signal D0
D0
DIN25
Signal D1
D1
182.1
Signal D2
D2
182.2
Signal D3
D3
10
GND
Signal D4
D4
11
12
GND
Signal D5
D5
13
14
GND
Signal D6
D6
15
16
GND
Signal D7
D7
17
18
GND
DIN 29
19
20
GND
Break
(4) Definition of the INPUT/OUTPUT indicator lights on the I/O board

Functions
Channel
Code
tracing R695
DI NO.
23
24
21
22
19
20
17
18
Code
Functions
R671
Impulse error
R696
System tracing on
on
N04
Increase voltage from

zero
Operation set B
R662
15
16
R664
Operation set C
Channel address
ADDS
13
14
R660
Operation set A
N03
11
12
Test
R651
10
R653
N02
R652
Start command
Electrical barking N01
Stop command
on
PSS on
R692
2-23
line breaker close
Increase
BIN1
BIN2
R607
R611
Code
DO NO.
Decrease excitation
excitation
Function
Program
Code
Function
Synchronic error
Twinkling
modification
Over excitation
operation
PT error
PTB
R631
10%U g
40% Ug
R632
WDOG
Error detect
3.2.6 Analogue quantity board

(1) Realize the electricity isolation through such AD sampling as the terminal PT,
CT and system PT, and the excitation transformer secondary CT.
(2) Regulate the signal analogue quantity
(3) Connect with the DSP board, transfer the above electricity to the DSP board
(4) Testing and regulating signals for over excitation (output through transistors)
(3) 10%Ug voltage signal testing (output through transistors)
(4) The regulation of channel C and impulse output
(5) AVR, PSS section testing and interface for testing signal input
(6) Connection with the digital quantity BUS board.
3.2.6.2 Manual Channel C

Channel C is an analogue regulator located on integrates circuit. With excitation
current as feedback quantity, the setting is achieved through control by a SCM of a
serial D/A converter of 12-digit accuracy. Linear integrated PID regulating circuit is
used for regulation. Output control signals are sent to triggering board for phase shift
triggering. SCM for realization of setting has its own EPROM, rich I/O resources and
2-24
in

real-time interruption functions to ensure the most concise hardware without other
necessary peripheral parts.
Excitation regulation of Channel C, entirely different from that of microcomputer
regulator in realizing principle and approach, can therefore have good standby
function. Its functions are comparatively simple. Apart from regulation based on
excitation current, other functions are automatic presetting, channel tracking, terminal
voltage limitation and low-frequency inverting etc.
(1) The main functions of Channel C
Constant excitation current regulation
Control of Constant control angle
voltage control
Quantity setting and automatic presetting
Automatic tracking operation channel
Low-frequency inversion
Phase shift triggering and impulse control
Watchdog signal output for error testing
Lowest excitation current limitation
(2) Quantity Setting

The increasing or decreasing switch excitation signals change the data inside the
register, which is converted through the serial digital D/A converter of 12-bit accuracy.
The output is the quantity setting of excitation current for this channel.
The quantity setting has the functions of automatic presetting and automatic
tracking. Without the startup dictation, it is set as the lowest limit. When there is a
dictation for startup, it will automatically track along the current operating channel, so
that the signals are basically compatible with the channel. The accuracy of tracking
is regulated by W3 potentiometer.
When Channel C is operated, the automatic
tracking is invalidation.
The quantity setting in Channel C has the function of setting the lowest limit once it
is interconnected with a particular set of computers, so as to prevent the accidental
loss of excitation by miscarriage. When the set of computers are not working and
2-25

the low frequency inversion starts, it automatically would move back to the lowest
limit set by the excitation current.
(3) Phase shift triggering board
Phase shift triggering board receive phase shift control signal, synchronization
signal, and other assistant control signals, to realize the function of impulse output.
It is an independent integrated unit, which is set on the impulse trigger board,
connected with it through the 20-feeted plugs.
The size of
the
phase shift
triggering board is 118mm70mm20mm.

The model number is MU004, it is a 6-phase trigger controlled by the analogue
quantity, suitable for stream and inversion control of the crystal break tube of
3-phase full bridge (or half bridge).
Different from the ordinary triggers, phase
shift-triggering board is the combination of IC digit and IC analogue electric circuit,

giving full play the respective advantages of the 2 circuits.
It has simple
components, no debugging trouble, multi functions and high reliability.

Main characteristics:
a. Output of 6-phase impulse
b. With the lowest and high limit for the control angle inside
c. Normal work under circumstance of synchronization signal frequency
changing.
d. With the functions of testing in interruption and inversion.
e. With
permit/prohibit port for inversion in the setting
f. With
permit/prohibit port for impulse output on the setting
g. Automatic regulation for the symmetry in the 6-phase impulse location.

When the control signal waves are huge, the imbalance of the phase
location is within the range of 2 degrees.
h. With high resistance against interruption
Definition for the introducing foot
A 20-line plain line socket, the definition as following, introduces the outlet
socket of the phase shift triggering board:
2-26

Functions
Signal
Direction
type
A-phase
AC24V
Input
Code
Introducing
Code
Direc
Signal
No.
foot
No.
tion
type
UA
UB
Input
AC
B-phase
24V
in-phase
in-phase
signal
Functions
signal
C-phase
AC24V
Input
UC
GND
Input
Inversion
TTL
Input
K1
UK
Input
prohibit
low-freq
Signal spot
in-phase
signal
0~6
Phase
VDC
shift
uency
control
signal
validity
5V Power
DC5V
Break
of TTL
phase
or low-freq
inversion
+5V
+12V
Output
PTB
10
GND
Output
M-A
11
12
M-B
DC
12V
12V
power
Power spot
uency
validity
-A-phase
TTL
Outp
TTL
-B
impulse
high-fre
ut
high-fre
-Phase
quency
quency
impulse
validity
validity
-C-phase
TTL
impulse
high-fre
Outp
TTL
+A
ut
high-fre
-Phase
quency
quency
impulse
validity
validity
+B-phase
TTL
impulse
high-fre
Output
Output
M-C
M+B
13
14
15
16
quency
2-27
M+A
M+C
Outp
TTL
+C
ut
high-fre
-phase
quency
impulse

validity
In-phase
TTL
impulse
low-freq
validity
Output
CF
Outp
TTL
Low
ut
low-freq
frequency
uency
uency
inversion
validity
validity
NC
17
18
19
20
DP
OP
Input
TTL
Impulse
low-freq
output permit
uency
validity
3.2.6.3 Definition of ports and linkers in the analogue quantity

BUS board
(1) Definition for jumpers, potential device and linkers
Name
Foot quantity
Functions
JA
20PIN
Linked with J6 DSP board in channel A
JB
20PIN
Linked with J6 DSP board in channel B
JC
34PIN
Linked with switch quantity board JC1
I1
10PIN
Linked with the port
I2
10PIN
Linked with the port
X1~X9
3PIN
Linked with the port on CT and CT

current
W2
Regulation of voltage limitation in

Channel C
W3
Regulation of tracking in Channel C
W4
Presetting for over excitation protection
JP1
Short-circuit this jumper, channel C is

operated in constant control angle;
when it is on break, channel C is in the
2-28

mode of constant excitation current
regulation
LDI
increase director light for channel C
LDD
decrease director light for channel C
LDX
Limitation
of
increase/
decrease
director light for channel C

(2) Definition for JA/JB socket
Functions
Definition
A-phase port UA1
Line NO.
Definition Functions
UB1
B-phase port PT voltage
IA
A-phase
PT voltage
C-phase port UC1
PT voltage
power
generator
power
generator
current
B-phase
IB
IC
power
C-phase
current
generator
current
System
PT US
IL
Excitation current
voltage
Stand-by A/D
V1
10
V2
Stand-by A/D
Stand-by A/D
V3
11
12
V4
In-phase voltage
13
14
UKB
Set B control signal
15
16
UAB
Measurement
Set A control UKA

signal
Set C control UKC
signal
Power
of
frequency for ports

and AGND
17
18
-12
-12V power
19
20
+12
+12V power
signal spot
+12V power
+12
(3) Definition for J/C Socket
2-29
voltage

Functions
Definition
Line.
Definition
Functions
No.
In-phase signals
A3
B3
In-phase signal
In-phase signals
C3
UG2
Port voltage
Increased excitation
R618
R620
Reduced excitation
channel tracking on
R695
IL
Excitation current signal
Start command
R651
10
R652
On grid signal
-A impulse
-A
11
12
+A
+A impulse
-B impulse
-B
13
14
+B
+B impulse
-C impulse
-C
15
16
+C
+C impulse
Testing signals
052
17
18
UKW
Set C control signal
19
20
COMC
Set C Operation
Over-excitation protection R639

signals
Ug>10%
R631
21
22
R653
Inversion de-excitation
Set A control signal
UKA
23
24
UKB
Set A in-phase voltage
V4
25
26
(V4)
Set B in-phase voltage
27
28
29
30
DC24V+
R601
31
32
R601
DC24V+
DC24V-
R602
33
34
R602
DC24V-
(4) Definition for wiring terminal I1

Terminal
Code
Functions
Remarks
No.
No.
+12
Set A +12V power
-12
Set A 12 power
GND
Set A ground
V1
Analogue quantity input 1
Extended usage such as testing
V2
No wiring in the EXC 9000
V3
normal excitation
2-30

7
GND
Power ground
(+12)
Set B +12V power
(-12)
Set B 12V power
10
GND
Set B ground
(5) Definition for wiring terminal I2

Terminal No.
Code
Functions
Remarks
No.
1
A611
1PT A- phase voltage
B611
1PT B- phase voltage
C611
1PT C- phase voltage
N600
A621
B621
C621
A631
B631
10
C631
PT neutral point
(6) Definition for wiring terminal X1~X9

Terminal No.
Code No.
Functions
Remarks
X1-1
A461
1CT A-phase current
Input
X1-2
N461
Output
X1-3
X2-1
B461
X2-2
N461
1CT B-phase current
Input
Output
X2-3
X3-1
C461
X3-2
N461
1CT C-phase current
Input
Output
X3-3
X4-1
A462
2CT A-phase current
2-31
Input

X4-2
N462
Output
X4-3
X5-1
B462
X5-2
N462
2CT B-phase current
Input
Output
X5-3
X6-1
C462
X6-2
N462
2CT C-phase current
Input
Output
X6-3
X7-1
A463
X7-2
N463
3CT A-phase current
Input
Output
X7-3
X8-1
B463
X8-2
N463
3CT B-phase current
Input
Output
X8-3
X9-1
C463
X9-2
N463
3CT C-phase current
Input
Output
X9-3
3.2.7 digital quantity BUS board

(1) Realizing transfer of different digital quantity signals
(2) Realizing control of impulse, such as residual voltage flashing, pulse cut,
on/off of the rectifier pulse, ect.
(3) Intelligent current balancing setting, which is used to regulate the
close-ring current balancing in the rectifier cubicles
(4) Analogue quantity output transfer, used for testing
(5) DC24V Power testing
(6) Channel changeover
(7) Increase/decrease excitation
(8) Output of in-phase signal and impulse
2-32
3.2.7.2 definition for wiring terminal and linkers on the switch

quantity BUS board
(1) Definition of jumpers, potential device and linkers
Name
Introducing
Functions
foot
X1
16PIN
Wiring terminal
X2
16PIN
Wiring terminal
X3
10PIN
Wiring terminal
X4
16PIN
Wiring terminal
X5
16PIN
Wiring terminal
CN1
6PIN
Wiring terminal, CAN BUS Communicative

terminal
JA1
40PIN
Linked with set A machine basket J8
JB1
40PIN
Linked with set B machine basket J8
JC1
34PIN
Linked with analogue quantity board JC
JA2
20PIN
Linked with set A machine basket J7
JB2
20PIN
Linked with set B machine basket J7
J1
34PIN
Linked with SCM J5
J2
26PIN
Linked with rectifier impulse board J1
W1
Regulation potential device of intelligent current

balancing
JP1
2PIN
Exit for in-phase error and excitation loss
JP2
2PIN
Residual voltage flashing valid
JP3
2PIN
Short circuit, channel C valid
(2) Definition of wiring terminal X1

Terminal
Code No.
Functions
Remarks
R687
Electric braking start
Input signal
No.
1
2-33

2
R686
Remote excitation
Input signal
R688
Back to back generation on
Input signal
R684
Remote added excitation
Input signal
R689
Switch for de-excitation
Input signal
R621
Switched to Set A operation
Input signal
R690
Back to back braking
Input signal
R623
Switched to stand-by channels
Input signal
R691
Lock PSS
Input signal
10
R622
Switched to set B operation
Input signal
11
R679
Electric braking fail
Input signal
12
R683
Stop dictation
Input signal
13
R681
Start dictation
Input signal
14
R682
Signals for interconnection (on Input signal

grid)
15
R680
95% speed signals
Input signal
16
R685
Remote deduced excitation
Input signal

Terminal
Code No.
Functions
Remarks
+24I
Line I DC24V power+
Input signal
+24II
Line II DC24V power+
Input signal
GND
DC24V- (public terminal)
Input signal
GND
DC24V- (public terminal)
R697
Automatic switch
Input signal
R651
Automatic switch
Output signal
R698
SFC start
Input signal
R631
>10%Ug
Output signal
R639
Protection of over excitation
Output signal
10
QFG~
Impulse cut off
No.
2-34
when circuit Input signal

switch open
11
12
R658
BOD action signal
Input signal
13
Man B
Set B short circuit testing switch
Input signal
(reverse)
14
Man A
Set A short circuit testing switch
Input signal
(reverse)
15
Test B
Input signal
(reverse)
16
Test A
Input signal
(reverse)

Terminal
Code No.
Functions
Remarks
A1
Synchronization voltage
Input
B1
Input
C1
Input
GND
Analogue spot
Input
A2
Input
GND
Analogue spot
Input
A3
Input
B3
Input
C3
Input
10
GND
Analogue spot
Input
No.

Terminal
Code No.
Functions
Remarks
+5
SET A +5V power
Input
+5
Set A +5V power
Input
No.
2-35

3
ND
Set A power sport
Input
GND
Set A power sport
Input
+12
Set A +12V power
Input
+12
Set A +12V power
Input
-12
Set A -12V power
Input
-12
Set A -12V power
Input
(+5)
Set B +5V power
Input
10
(+5)
Set B +5V power
Input
11
GND
Set B power sport
Input
12
GND
Set B power sport
Input
13
(+12)
Set B +12V power
Input
14
(+12)
Set B +12V power
Input
15
(-12)
Set B -12V power
Input
16
(-12)
Set B -12V power
Input

Terminal
Code No.
Functions
Remarks
(DA0)
Set B D/A output CH0
Output
(DA1)
Output
(DA2)
Output
GND
Analogue spot
Output
DA0
Set A D/A output CH0
Output
DA1
Output
DA2
Output
SW0
Debugged by the manufactory
Input signal
SW1
Debugged by the manufactory
Input signal
10
COMC
Set C operation
Output signal
11
COMB
Set B operation
Output signal
12
COMA
Set A operation
Output signal
No.
2-36

13
S.B
Set B standby
Output signal
14
S.C
Set C standby
Output signal
15
UG2
Terminal voltage signals
Output signal
16
R624
Switch to C operation/standby
Input signal
(6) Definition of wiring terminal CN1

Terminal
Code No.
Functions
Remarks
CAN+
Communication with CAN BUS
CAN+
CAN-
CAN-
GND2
No.
Linked
with
screening spot
6
GND2
(7) Definition of sockets JA1/JB1

Functions
Definition
Added excitation
R607(R613)
Line No.
1
Definition
Functions
R611(R617) Deduced
excitation
SFC start
BINI
BIN2
PSS on
R692
R652
Interconnection
N02
Back
Electric
braking N01
excitation
to
back
generating
Start command
R651
Back to back rotor N03
10
R653
11
12
TESTA/B
Stop command
start
Channel address
GND
13
14
COMA
Set A operation
Set B operation
COMB
15
16
COMC
Set C operation
Automatic switch
N04
17
18
Y47
19
20
R696
System
Channel
tracking R695
2-37
tracking

input
input
Debugging
SW0
21
22
SW1
Debugging
Testing
MANA/B
23
24
R671
Impulse error
PT error
PTB
25
26
R631
10% Ug
40%Ug
R632
27
28
WDOG
Error examination
29
30
In-phase error
or R28
excitation loss
CAN BUS +
CAN+
31
32
CAN-
CAN BUS -
D/A channel 0
DA0
33
34
DA1
D/A CHANNEL 1
D/A channel 2
DA2
35
36
DA3
D/A CHANNEL 3
DC24V +
R601
37
38
R601
DC24V+
DC24V-
R602
39
40
R602
DC24V-
(8) Definition of socket JC

Function
Definition
Line No.
Definition
Function
In-phase signal
A3
B3
Synchronization signal
In-phase signal
C3
UG2
Generator voltage
Added excitation
R618
R620
Decrease excitation
Channel tracking
R695
IL
Excitation current
Start dictation
R651
10
R652
Interconnection
signals
-A impulse
-A
11
12
+A
+A impulse
-B impulse
-B
13
14
+B
+B impulse
-C impulse
-C
15
16
+C
+C impulse
SCM signals
052
17
18
UKW
Set C tracking signals
for R639
19
20
COMC
Set C operation
10%Ug
R631
21
22
R653
Inversion
Set A control signals
UKA
23
24
UKB
Set A in-phase voltage
V4
25
26
(V4)
Set B in-phase voltage
Protection
over-excitation
2-38

27
28
29
30
DC24V+
R601
31
32
R601
DC24V+
DC24V-
R602
33
34
R602
DC24V-
(9) Definition of sockets JA2/JB2

Function
Definition
Line No.
Definition
Function
Lock & Store
182.3
182.0
Signal D0
D0
DIN25
Signal D1
D1
182.1
Signal D2
D2
182.2
Signal D3
D3
10
GND
Signal D4
D4
11
12
GND
Signal D5
D5
13
14
GND
Signal D6
D6
15
16
GND
Signal D7
D7
17
18
GND
DIN29
19
20
GND
Break
(10) Definition of socket J1

Function
Definition
De-excitation switch X40
Line No.
Definition
Function
X41
Lock PSS
N01
Set excitation with
close
Electric
braking X42
failure
Back
electric braking
to
back X44(N02)
N03
generation
Set A regulator error
Back
to
back
electric motion
X46(R672)
X47(R672)
Set
regulator
error
Sat A Power error
X48(R674)
10
X49(R674)
>10%Ug
X4A(R631)
11
12
X4B(R650) Manual excitation
13
14
X4D(R652) Interconnection
2-39
Sat B Power error

signals
Stop dictation
X4E(R654)
15
16
X4F(R639)
Protection
for
over-excitation
Channel tracking
Y40(R695)
17
18
Y41(R696)
Set
systematic
voltage tracking
Set Recorded wave Y4A(BIN2)
19
20
Y43
Added excitation
21
22
Y45(R651)
Automatic
trigger
Deduced excitation
Y44
excitation
Set Residual voltage Y46
23
24
Y47
25
26
Y49
Switched to Set A
excitation
Set PSS
Y48(R692)
operation and Set

B stand-by
DC 24V I normal
X56
27
28
X57
DC24V II normal
Set A MCU testing
X50(B051)
29
30
X51(B051)
Set B MCU testing
Set C MCU testing
X52(B052)
31
32
X55
Set A operation
Set B operation
X54(COMB) 33
34
Set C operation/
stand-by
(11) Definition of socket J2

Signal
Definition
Code
Line No.
No.
Out
Impulse
+24V
Code
Impulse
-A
Impulse
+24V
+A
Impulse
Out
+A-phase
Out
impulse
+24V
-B
power
Out
-A-phase
impulse
power
Out
Signal
No.
power
Out
Definition
-B-phase
Out
impulse
+24V
2-40
+B
+B-phase
Out

power
Out
impulse
Impulse
+24V
10
-C
power
Out
Impulse
NC
Switch
Out
impulse
+24V
11
12
+C
power
Out
-C-phase
+C-phase
Out
impulse
of CONA
13
14
de-excitation CONB
15
16
and impulse
CONC
17
18
COND
19
20
R308
21
22
Residual
EQ_L Intelligent
voltage
equal
excitation
electric
Out
flow
current
Out
Power +24V
+24V
23
24
+24V
Power
Out
+24V
In
Power 0V
CND
25
26
CND
Power 0 V
In
3.2.8 LOU Board

LOU board is the core operational part of the EXC9000 excitation system,
controlling the state information and operational dictations from the CAN BUS. It
operates on the systematic parts through the CAN BUS or I/O signals.
The state signals of non-intelligent part are introduced to LOU by means of the
connection point.
The key controlling signals such as the initiative excitation power,
failure of inversion and the switch of de-excitation are exported through the
connection point, too.
To finish its operation, the logic of this board includes: control of excitation
flashing, control of the switch for channel tracking, control of the switch for
systematic voltage tracking, testing for failure of inversion, PSS control of manual
2-41

switch, ect. For detailed operational process please refer to related chapters for
software use.
There is a restoring button SW1, which enables people to independently restore
the board.
3.2.8.2 Definition of the wiring terminals and linkers

(1) Definition for jumpers, potential device and the linkers.
Name
Introducing foot
Functions
X1
16PIN
Wiring terminal
X2
16PIN
Wiring terminal
X3
6PIN
DC24V power terminal &power testing
X4
6PIN
Wiring terminal & communication terminal of

CAN BUS
J5
34PIN
Linked with the switch board J1
JTAG1
10PIN
Programming interface JTAG
LED1~LED8
Line 8 output director light
LED9
5V Power director
LED10
3.3V Power director
JP1
2PIN
Permit /prohibit program
LK1
2PIN
Resistor jumper on CAN BUS terminal resistance
(2) Definition for the wiring terminal X1

Terminal
Code No.
Signal definition
No.
Correspondent
Signals explain
MCU address
X30
P5.7
X31
P5.6
X32
P5.5
X33
P5.4
X34
P5.3
X35
P5.2
2-42

7
X336
P5.1
X37
P5.0
X38
P4.7
10
X39
P4.6
11
X3A
P4.5
12
X3B
P4.4
13
X3C
P4.3
14
X3D
P4.2
15
X3E
P4.1
16
X3F
P4.0

Terminal Code No.
Signal definition
No.
Correspondent
Signals explain
MCU address
O1
P7.0
Relay point output
O2
P7.1
Relay point output
O3
P7.2
Relay point output
O4
P7.3
Relay point output
O5
P7.4
Relay point output
O6
P7.5
Relay point output
O7
P7.6
Relay point output
O8
P7.7
Relay point output
C1
O1~O8
output
terminal
10
DGND1
11
Y4F
24V power spot

AVR
P3.7
Output signal
of P3.6
Output signal
Communicative
state
12
Y4E
Failure
inversion
2-43

13
Y4D
Error
of
the P3.5
Output signal
de-excitation
switch
14
Y4C
>50%If0
P3.4
Output signal
15
Y4B
Excitation power
P3.3
Output signal
16
Y42
Input of electric
Output signal
braking
Terminal No.
Code No.
Function
R601
24V Power
R602
24V power spot
Remarks
(5) Socket J5
Refer to chapter 3.2.7.2 (11) definition for socket J1.
3.2.9 Intelligent IO board

The No. of the IO board in the EXC9000 excitation system is IIU. This board
comprises a SCM, CAN BUS interface, photoelectric isolation system, serial
communicative interface, output relay and a controlling circuit. The CAN BUS
receives signals from the excitation system and then translates it into I/O signals. On
the one hand, the signals are exported through the relay connection point, so that the
monitored control system in the power plant can introduce the excitation information
through connection point. . On the other, IIU can also be connected with the
monitored control system in the power plant through the RS485 serial communicative
interface.
the board.
There can be flexible definition by special software for the relay signals exported
from the IO board.
2-44
3.2.9.2 Definition for wiring terminals and linkers on the IO

board
(1) Definition for jumpers, potential device and linkers.
Name
Introducing foot
Functions
X1
16PIN
Wiring terminal
X2
16PIN
Wiring terminal
X3
10PIN
Wiring terminal
X4
16PIN
Wiring terminal
X5
16PIN
Wiring terminal
X6
16PIN
Wiring terminal
X7
6PIN
Wiring terminal, CAN BUS terminal
X8
2PIN
DC24V power terminal
X9
2PIN
485 communicative terminal
J13
3PIN
Serial communicative terminal
JTAG1
10PIN
JATG programming interface
LED1~LED48
48 line output director light
LED49
5Vpower director
LED50
3.3V power director
LED51
CAN communicative director
LED52
Stand-by
JP2
2PIN
Permit/prohibit programming
LK1
2PIN
Resistor jumper on CAN BUS terminal
(2) Definition for terminal point X1~X6

Relay
K1
K2
MUC
Code.
Terminal Terminal Code.
MUC
address
No.
No.
address
P3.0
P3.1
No.
No.
O1
X1-1
X6-16
O48
C1
X1-2
X6-15
C6
O2
X1-3
X6-14
O47
C1
X1-4
X6-13
C6
2-45
Relay
P2.7
K48
P2.6
K47

K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
K10
K11
K12
K13
K14
K15
K16
K17
K18
K19
P3.2
P3.3
P3.4
P3.5
P3.6
P3.7
P6.0
P6.1
P6.2
P6.3
P6.4
P6.5
P6.6
P6.7
P7.0
P7.1
P7.2
O3
X1-5
X6-12
O46
C1
X1-6
X6-11
C6
O4
X1-7
X6-10
O45
C1
X1-8
X6-9
C6
O5
X1-9
X6-8
O44
C1
X1-10
X6-7
C6
O6
X1-11
X6-6
O43
C1
X1-12
X6-5
C6
O7
X1-13
X6-4
O42
C1
X1-14
X6-3
C6
O8
X1-15
X6-2
O41
C1
X1-16
X6-1
C6
O9
X2-1
X5-16
O40
C2
X2-2
X5-15
C5
O10
X2-3
X5-14
O39
C2
X2-4
X5-13
C5
O11
X2-5
X5-12
O38
C2
X2-6
X5-11
C5
O12
X2-7
X5-10
O37
C2
X2-8
X5-9
C5
O13
X2-9
X5-8
O36
C2
X2-10
X5-7
C5
O14
X2-11
X5-6
O35
C2
X2-12
X5-5
C5
O15
X2-13
X5-4
O34
C2
X2-14
X5-3
C5
O16
X2-15
X5-2
O33
C2
X2-16
X5-1
C5
O17
X3-1
X4-16
O32
C3
X3-2
X4-15
C4
O18
X3-3
X4-14
O31
C3
X3-4
X4-13
C4
O19
X3-5
X4-12
O30
C3
X3-6
X4-11
C4
2-46
P2.5
K46
P2.4
K45
P2.3
K44
P2.2
K43
P2.1
K42
P2.0
K41
P5.7
K40
P5.6
K39
P5.5
K38
P5.4
K37
P5.3
K36
P5.2
K35
P5.1
K34
P5.0
K33
P4.7
K32
P4.6
K31
P4.5
K30

K20
K21
K22
K23
K24
P7.3
P7.4
P7.5
P7.6
P7.7
O20
X3-7
X4-10
O29
C3
X3-8
X4-9
C4
O21
X3-9
X4-8
O28
C3
X3-10
X4-7
C4
O22
X3-11
X4-6
O27
C3
X3-12
X4-5
C4
O23
X3-13
X4-4
O26
C3
X3-14
X4-3
C4
O24
X3-15
X4-2
O25
C3
X3-16
X4-1
C4
P4.4
K29
P4.3
K28
P4.2
K27
P4.1
K26
P4.0
K25
(3) Definition for wiring terminal X7

Terminal No.
Code No.
Function
Remarks
CAN+
CAN BUS communication
CAN+
CAN-
CAN-
GND2
Linked to the spot

Terminal No.
Code No.
Function
R601
24V power
R602
24V power spot
Remarks

Terminal No.
Code No.
Function
Remarks
DATA:-
485 communicative
terminal
DATA:+
485 communicative
terminal
2-47
3.2.10 The human-machine interface in the regulator ---color

liquid crystal touch screen
The human-machine interface of the regulator is the main tool for communication
between the regulator and the operators, with the following main functions:
(1) Display:
The operational data display, operational state display, and error warning
display
(2) Operation:
Through the touch buttons of the human-machine interface, operators can set
the data, initiate excitation, switch on and off the function of residual voltage
flashing, track the channels, track the system voltage and adjust the
Deviation.
(3) Alarm:
When theres something wrong with the excitation system, there will be
image of error alarm.
(4) Error tracing:
The interface has a thorough record of errors and restoring information for
the system, which can be used to trace back the information of more than 150
errors.
3.2.10.2 operation
For detailed information please refer to the users guide chapter 4 the
human-machine interface.
3.3 Power supply

Tow 3-phase AC 380V power supplies introduced to the de-excitation cubicle,
facilitated each other as spare parts, within which there are automatic switch apparatus.
The AC power used in the excitation system (including the fan power, the transducer
power, illuminating and heating power) is all introduced through this cubicle.
2-48

The DC power of the excitation system is DC220V/DC110V, introduced from the
de-excitation cubicle. The DC includes the flash power, the DC controlling power
section I, the DC controlling power section II. If the DMX de-excitation switch is
used, special switch power should be increased.
(Attention: if there is only 2 excitation cubicles in the EXC9000 system, only one
line of AC power is needed introducing to the regulator, and the DC power is to be
linked to the regulator directly.)
The power of the weak current operation system is DC24V, including the operation
power for regulator and the power of impulse triggering.
The operation power for the DC 24V is supplied by 2 independent DC24V power
through the voltage transformer inside the excitation system and the DC controlling
power. Both have independent switches, lying on the guide rails inside the flank of the
regulator cubicle. When the generator is in normal condition, either of the breaks of
the 2-power supply would not affect the operation of the system.
The primary power of the voltage transformer comes from the input terminal of
rectifier cubicle. Generally, once the voltage on the generator terminal exceeds 60%
of the rated circuit voltage, the automatic voltage transformer would work normally.
The operating power of the work controller in the regulator is 12V and +5V, also
supplied by the voltage transformer and the DC power, through which the electricity
is transferred to A/B channel respectively. Each channel has its own independent
switch, when one of the power supply is switched off, the other would not be affected.
4 Rectifier cubicle
4.1 Working mode of rectifier cubicle
Tow rectifier cubicle redundancy modes may be provided based on users
requirements, namely single-bridge mode, and parallel running mode.
900M
2-49

Graph 1-8 Single-bridge mode
900M
900M
900M
Graph 1-9 Parallel running
4.2 The major components of each rectifier cubicle

There are 2 kinds of rectifier cubicle compatible with the regulator cubicle in the
EXC9000 excitation system, namely, the intelligent rectifier cubicle and the
conventional rectifier cubicle. First, the intelligent rectifier cubicle would be
introduced.
4.3 Intelligent rectifier cubicle

The major components of each rectifier cubicle are
6 crystal break tube components (silicon + heatsinker)
6 fast fuses with contact indictor
6 impulse voltage transformer with high voltage tolerance
1 set of integrated interrupted RC protection device
1 or 2 mutually standby fans
1 or 2 wind pressure points for on-off monitoring of the 2 fans
1 rectifier cubicle intelligent controlling board
1 pulse board
1 LCD display with touching buttons
3 current sensors
1 or 2 temperature-measuring resistor to check temperature of fan wind
2-50
4.3.1 intelligent control board of rectifier cubicle

The intelligent control board of rectifier cubicle consists of a SCM, CAN BUS
interface, photoelectric isolation circuit and its controlling circuit.
Signals from
the rectifier cubicle are sent to the SCM through the screen or the connecting
wiring terminal. The SCM would export the processed signals, the output signals
are then sent to the screen or through the photoelectric isolation circuit and the
control circuit, and last of all, they would be used to control the operation.
This board can be used in intelligent testing and controlling, realizing the
testing of bridge-arm current, the testing of cool wind temperature, the monitoring
of fast fuse, the monitoring of resistor capacitance protection, the monitoring of
wind pressure measurement, the controlling of intelligent balancing current, the
controlling of on/off the fans, the adjustment of the current display in rectifier
cubicle, the settings of the rectifier cubicle, and the communication of CAN, ect.
When it is off, theres signal sent to the excitation regulator.
The main layout of this board:
8-line relay output (4 of the contacts has the common point)
8-line optical coupling input
6-line A/D
2-line temperature-measuring input
2-line D/A
CAN BUS interface
1 LCD display driving interface
JTAG programming interface
the board.
4.3.1.2 definition of wiring terminal and linkers on the
2-51
rectifier cubicle
(1) Definition for the jumpers, the potentiometer and the linkers.
Name
Introducing
Functions
foot
X1
10PIN
Wiring terminal
X2
10PIN
Wiring terminal
X3
10PIN
DC24V power terminal
X4
6PIN
Wiring terminal, CAN BUS communicative

terminal
X5
3PIN
1# resistor for temperature measurement wiring

terminal
X6
3PIN
2# resistor for temperature measurement wiring

terminal
J2
26PIN
Linked with the screen
JTAG1
10PIN
JTAG programming interface
W1, W2
Potential device for temperature adjustment
KEY1.1
Lock the systematic image
KEY1.2
On/off of the intelligent equal flow
KEY1.3
Setting for CAN communicative stations
KEY1.4
J3
(Impulse) standby
J4
(Impulse) standby
J5
(Impulse) standby
J6
(Impulse) standby
LED1
5V Power indicator
LED2
3.3V Power indicator
JP1
Permit/prohibit programming
LK1
Resistor jumper at the CAN BUS terminal
Function for Key 1:

2-52

Code
Functions
Off: prohibit the adjustment of data

On: permit the adjustment of data
Off: withdraw of the intelligent equal flow

On: input of the intelligent equal flow
Setting
of
No. 1 rectifier
the
003off, 4off
cubicle
rectifier cubicle
No. 2 rectifier
01: 3off, 4on
cubicle
No. 3 rectifier
10: 3on, 4off
cubicle
No. 4 rectifier
11: 3on, 4on
cubicle
Terminal
Code No.
No.
Definition
of
the Correspond
signals
ent
Signal
MCU explanation
address
1
R601
24V power +
R601
24V power +
R602
24V power spot
R602
24V power spot
C1
Output
common
O1~O3
point
6
C1
Output
Output
common terminal
common
O1~O3
point
Output
common terminal
L04
Darlington output
P5.3
O1
Contact output
P5.0
O2
Contact output
P5.1
On/off A fan
10
O3
Contact output
P5.2
On/off B fan
2-53

Terminal No.
Code No.
Definition
of Correspondent
the signals
1
D11.4
D11.5
D11.6
D11.7
MCU address
Signal
explanation
Switch quantity P4.4
Pulse
cutting
input
status
Wind
input
Contact of Fan A
Wind
input
Contact of Fan B
Fast fuse contact
input
of the rectifier
pressure
pressure
cubicle
5
D11.0
Fast fuse contact
input
of
resistor
capacitance
protection
6
D11.1

input
D11.2

input
D11.3

input
DGND1
10
DGND1
Hole sensor power +()

4Definition for the wiring terminal X3
Terminal No.
Code No.
+12V
12V
Function
Remarks
Power +12V
Hole sensor power -
2-54
Power 12V

3
AGND
Power spot
DA00(PA
Current of Rectifier +bridge Analogue quantity
arm
DA10(PA
Current of Rectifier +bridge Analogue quantity
arm
PULSEOFF
Pulse cutting
AGND
Analogue spot
ADIN3
Rectifier A-phase current
Power spot
output
output
Analogue quantity
input
ADIN2
Rectifier B-phase current
Analogue quantity
input
10
ADIN1
Rectifier C-phase current
Analogue quantity
input

Terminal No.
Code No.
Function
Remarks
CAN+
CAN+
CAN-
CAN-
GND2
Linked to the
spot
GND2

Terminal No.
1
Code No.
Function
Resistor
Remarks
Signals
for Output of current
temperature-measurement
2
Resistor
Signals
for Signals
temperature-measurement temperature
measurement
2-55
for

3
Resistor
Signals
for Analogue spot
Terminal No.
Code No.
Function
Remarks
Resistor
Signals
for Output
2
Resistor
Signals
of
current
for Signals
for
temperature
measurement
Resistor
Signals
for Analogue spot
8Definition for socket J2
Function
Definition
Line No.
1
Definition
Function
DGND1
Common
spot
+5V power
VO
Write
+5
+5
+5V power
Common spot
WR
CD
Control
Restore
DGND1
10
DB0
Data
Data
RST
11
12
DB2
Data
Data
DB1
13
14
DB4
Data
Data
DB3
15
16
DB6
Data
Data
DB5
17
18
DGND1
Common
spot
Negative light
DB7
19
20
DGND1
Common
spot
Touching
B+
21
22
KEY22
button F1
Touching
Touching
button F2
KEY11
23
24
2-56
KEY44
Touching

button F3
Touching
button F4
KEY33
25
26
+5
+5V power
button F5
4.3.2 Definition of the wiring terminals and linkers of impulse

board
4.3.3 control of the intelligent rectifier cubicle
There is an intelligent control system in each rectifier cubicle, which comprises
intelligent detecting unit, communication interface, transformer, LCD display and
corresponding input/out circuits etc. With introduction of intelligent control system,
conventional gauges and indicators are abolished and operation, control, status
monitoring, information transmission and information display of the rectifier cubicle
are intelligent
Intelligent industrial condition detecting
The intelligent control system affects omnidirectional detecting of rectifier
with the following detecting functions.
Bridge-arm current and single-bridge output current
Fast fuse status (including RC protective fast fusing)
Temperature detecting at air inlet and air outlet
On-off status of fans
Wind pressure detecting
On/off status of the rectifier
Intelligent industrial condition display
On the door of each rectifier cubicle, there is a LCD display with touching buttons
for display of various statuses of the rectifier cubicle and for achievement of
corresponding operations, as shown in the following pictures.
2-57
Button of
Display of
function
bridge arm
Display
Display of
of
fiction
air
Intelligent information transmission

Local BUS technique is adopted in intelligent rectifier cubicle, through which
the switch quantity signal and analogue quantity signal of rectifier cubicle are
transmitted to regulator or directly to control system of power station. This not
only increases information transmission, but also decreases notably connection
lines between cubicles with improvement on both working reliability of the
system and the integral technique of the equipment.
......
1#
2#
3#
Intelligent fan control

When the rectifier cubicle detect the start command in the excitation system, or
the output current is over 100A, the fan is activated automatically; without the start
command and the output current is lower than 50A, the fan stops working
2-58

automatically.
In case cooling of rectifier cubicle adopts double-fan redundancy, the standby fan
can be chosen through the operating buttons on the control panel. This intelligent
control can increase availability of the fan and prolong its life expectancy. In case of
any fault in the running fan, e.g. phase loss of fan, low wind pressure etc, and standby
fan is automatically in use and the running fan is switched off at the same time.
4.4 Pulse formation

The pulse signal transmitted by excitation regulator is 120wide pulse, which, after
60KHZ pulse series signal modulation by pulse panel of rectifier cubicle, is converted
to high-frequency pulse series signal as shown in the following diagram.
8us
8uS
1200
Typical output traits of pulse circuit are shown in the following oscillogram.
2-59
4.5 intelligent current balancing

For several parallel connected rectifier cubicle, long-line current balancing, reactor
balancing, magnet ring balancing are usually adopted at present, which must match
with parameters of silicon components, otherwise balancing effects will not be
satisfactory. On the one hand, these balancing measures impose higher requirements
on quality and quantity of spare parts. On the other hand, traits of silicon components
and contact resistor of major circuit of rectifier cubicle may vary with the time, which
may result in change in current distribution. Intelligent balancing technique is ensured
that balancing coefficient will be higher than 97% without any other auxiliary
measures (such as long cable, matching of parameters of silicon components etc).
Whats more, after one or more rectifier cubicle make their exit; intelligent balancing
can still be achieved among working rectifier cubicles.
The intelligent balancing technique is based on control circuit, effects among
cubicles and inter-phase balancing through automatic regulation. In this way, the
major circuit may be connected with no balancing components. As a result, it not only
overcomes defects of conventional balancing techniques, but also effects high-level
balancing coefficients efficiently with consistency.
Current balancing automatic regulator is composed of the following units as pulse
interval formation, interval front line slope dealing, current deviation amplification,
pulse interval phase shift, pulse switching control, high-frequency pulse producer,
pulse array formation, pulse power amplification etc.
Pulse switching control unit in the automatic balancing regulator functions in two
ways. Firstly it is controlled by operating command of this cubicle or external
command and high-frequency pulse output is for bidden if necessary; Secondly it
matches with multi-cubicle parallel total output current and when pulse of this cubicle
is forbidden, branch current of total output current signal in this cubicle is also
automatically and simultaneously switched off so that current given value of cubicles
is the average of total current divided by number of working cubicles.
2-60
4.6 Pulse transformer

Two types of pulse transformers are designed in accordance with insulation
requirements.
The first type adopts vacuum epoxy casting technique. Its dielectric strength is
15,000-volt line-frequency without being penetrated for 1 minute. It is installed
independently on silicon components.
The second type has a dielectric strength of 5,000-volt line frequency without
being penetrated for 1 minute. It is installed on pulse amplification board
4.7 Long-distance transmission of pulse

Considering demands by some users of different locations of regulator and rectifier
cubicle, corresponding pulse circuits are designed to satisfy demands of long-distance
transmission of pulse. Its principle is light-current signals are converted to
heavy-current signals in regulator and are subject to long-distance transmission to
rectifier cubicle for further voltage division, isolation and amplification to drive pulse
transformer. To this end, a six-phase pulse transformer is installed in regulator, which
converts light-current signals into heavy-current signals. There is also a pulse
receiving board installed in rectifier cubicle, which ensures that the heavy-current
pulse signals, after voltage division by resistor, drives pulse transformer.
4.8 R-C protection

In excitation system, over-voltage may occur in AC/DC circuits for various reasons,
which can be external or internal: the former is mainly from atmosphere over-voltage
in power system or switch working over-voltage in excitation transformer, while the
latter is mainly from over-voltage in rectification and phase change of SCR in circuit
or internal faults of circuit etc. The occurrence of over-voltage may result in
over-voltage penetration of rectifying components of SCR. For this reason,
over-voltage protection circuit shall be installed.
In EXC-9000 system, rectifier cubicle AC side over-voltage protection and
phase-change over-voltage protection of silicon components adopt integrated RC
absorbing circuit with advantages like small volume, simple installation and reliable
2-61

protection etc. The circuit is shown in the following diagram.
4.9 Conventional rectifier cubicle

Major components of each cubicle:
6 SCR components
6 fast fusers with indicator
6-pulse voltage transformer
1set of isolated RC protection equipment
1 or 2 mutual stand-by fans
Normal machinery instrument and indicator light
Compared to the intelligent rectifier cubicle system, the conventional system is
more concise in structure and function as well. Without the intelligent controlling unit
and other corresponding testing parts, the data and signals for sampling and
monitoring are limited to a small range.
The indicators for signals are mainly
indicator lights, and the parameter such as the output current is mainly shown by
machinery display instrument.
It doesnt adopt the local BUS mode as other units for signal output. In stead, the
mode of relay connection is adopted, which, results in less information transmission
and more connecting wires among cubicles.
The current balancing among cubicles is mainly ensured by parameter matching
through SCR or long-line current balancing.
2-62
5. De-excitation and over-voltage protection

5.1 Block diagram of de-excitation and over-voltage
protection circuit
The typical de-excitation and over-voltage principle block diagram is as follows.
-QFG
-RD
-FR
-LGE
-V62
-V61
-A61
-CT
Diagram 1-10 de-excitation major circuit principle diagram

In the diagram:
QFG-Field circuit breaker
FR-energy-flow resistor
RD-rapid fuse
V61-diode
V62-SCR
A61-SCR trigger
CT-Over-voltage performance detector
In case of normal switch-off of excitation system, the regulator automatically
inverts for de-excitation; in case of an accidental switch-off, Field circuit breaker and
rotor field energy is shifted to non-linear resistor for de-excitation.
When the generator is not working normally, e.g. slip pole, an induced voltage will
be produced in the rotor circuit. Now rotor over-voltage detecting unit A61 installed
on rotor circuit will detect positive-direction over-voltage signal of rotor. And then the
V62 silicon controlled components will be triggered immediately, the non-linear
resistor unit FR will be in parallel connected into rotor circuit and the incurred
2-63

over-voltage energy will be eliminated through energy absorbing function of
consuming resistor; And the negative-direction over-voltage signals in rotor circuit
will be transmitted to absorbed energy by non-linear resistor by the way of V61 diode
to ensure refrain of open circuit of the generator rotor and reliable protection of the
rotor insulation from damage. Due to this protection, the rotor windings will generate
an adverse magnetic field, neutralize the reversing field generated by negative
sequence current of stators to protect surface of rotors and rotor protective ring against
burning.
In concert with over-voltage protection, corresponding command signals are sent to
monitoring system through monitoring current signals of mutual inductor CT.
Field circuit breaker may be installed either on DC side or on AC side.
The major advantage to adopt AC de-excitation is simple selection of AC switch,
mature manufacturing technology, low production cost, safer guarantee rendered for
detecting and maintenance by installation of Field circuit breaker on AC side. The
smaller rated current than DC side may also be used in rectifiers fault protection. Its
defects are bad arc-interruption efficiency, low arc voltage. So pulse shall also be cut,
otherwise energy cant be transferred through inversion. In case of generator short
circuit, excitation transformer secondary side short circuit etc, the AC voltage is zero,
inversion conditions are not ready, which results in fault in AC de-excitation.
When the same switch is installed on DC side, shutoff arc voltage is 1.5 times of
that on AC side, which is great advantage to inversion. The installation of switch on
DC side may also defend against faults in initializing excitation and electrical braking
processes. It is best to install Field circuit breaker on DC side for large-scale
generating set.
De-excitation resistor can be ZnO or Sic. And linear resistor can also be used. The
design of de-excitation resistor should take consideration of arc voltage of circuit
breaker in the field circuit breaker, the maximum voltage allowed by excitation
windings as well as possible maximum energy in excitation windings.
Upon receipt of excitation protection tripping command from generator protection
or from within, filed circuit breaker is disconnected, pulse is discontinued, and
through the negative diode the excitation current flows to the de-excitation resistor. In
2-64

the de-excitation circuit with the SCR installed in the negative direction, when the
filed circuit breaker is disconnected and pulse is discontinued, the SCR connector is
triggered.
After this measure is adopted, secondary AC voltage of excitation
transformer is superposed to electric arc voltage of filed circuit breaker to ensure

reliable energy shift and shortening de-excitation time.
Conv
Conv
Field flashing
Discharge
Field flashing
Discharge
FCB
SCB
FFB
SSD
FFB
Crowbar
Crowbar
Batt
Batt
RE
RE
Diagram 1-11 Field circuit breaker installed on DC side
Diagram 1-12Fieldcircuit breaker installed on AC side
5.2 Allocation of the de-excitation cubicle

There are 2 types of de-excitation cubicles in EXC9000 excitation system: the
intelligent de-excitation cubicle and the conventional de-excitation cubicle. The
intelligent de-excitation cubicle would be first introduced.
5.3 Intelligent de-excitation cubicle

The intelligent de-excitation cubicle is mainly composed of :
A filed circuit breaker
A set of de-excitation resistor (linear or non-linear )
A set of SCR crowbar unit
A LCD display with touching buttons
A controlling board for intelligent de-excitation
A DC transducer board
A set of DC voltage and current transducer
5.3.1 the controlling board for intelligent de-excitation

The hard ware circuit of this board is identical to that of the rectifier cubicle
2-65

intelligent control board.
5.3.1.1 Definition for the wiring terminal and linkers on this

board
(1) Definition for jumpers, potential device and linkers:
Name
Introducing foot
Function
X1
10PIN
Wiring terminal
X2
10PIN
Wiring terminal
X3
10PIN
Power terminal DC24V
X4
6PIN
Wiring terminal, CAN BUS communicative

terminal
X5
3PIN
X6
3PIN
J2
26PIN
Linked with the display
JTAG1
10PIN
The programming interface JTAG
W1,W2
KEY1.1
The system image lock
KEY1.2
KEY1.3
KEY1.4
J3
J4
J5
J6
LED1
5V POWER INDICATOR
LED2
3.3V POWER INDICATOR
JP1
PROHIBIT/PERMIT PROGRAMMING
LK1
TERMINAL RESISTOR JUMPER AT CAN BUS
Functions explained for Key 1
2-66

Dialing code
Functions explained
Off: no permit of parameter adjustment

On: permit of parameter adjustment
2Definition for wiring terminal X1

Terminal
Code
Signals definition
No.
No.
R601
24V Power +
R601
24V Power +
R602
24V Power spot
R602
24V Power spot
C1
Output
Corresponding
MCU address
common
O1~O3output
point
6
C1
Signals explanation
Output
common terminal
common
O1~O3output
point
common terminal
L04
Darlington output
P5.3
O1
Contacting output
P5.0
>90%Uge Signal
O2
Contacting output
P5.1
Collective
de-excitation
switch
10
O3
Contacting output
P5.2
Divided
de-excitation
switch

Terminal
Code No.
Signals definition
No.
1
D11.4
Switch
Corresponding
Signals
MCU address
explanation
quantity P4.4
input
2
D11.5
Switch
DC current I
Powered off
quantity P4.5
input
DC current II
Powered off
2-67

3
D11.6
Switch
quantity P4.6
AC
input
4
D11.7
Switch
off
quantity P4.7
De-excitation
input
5
D11.0
Switch
switch on
quantity P4.0
De-excitation
input
6
D11.1
Switch
powered
switch divided
quantity P4.1
Rotor
input
over-voltage
protection
D11.2
Switch
quantity P4.2
input
8
D11.3
Switch
quantity P4.3
input
9
DGND1
Digital spot
10
DGND1
Digital spot

Terminal No.
Code No.
Function
Remarks
+12V
+12V power
12V
-12V power
AGND
Power spot
DA00(PA)
DA10(PA)
PULSEOFF
AGND
ADIN3
ADIN2
Analogue spot
Analogue quantity input
Excitation
current
10
ADIN1
Excitation
voltage
2-68

Terminal No.
Code No.
Function
Remarks
CAN+
CAN+
CAN-
CAN-
GND2
Linked
to
the
screening spot
6
GND2
6Socket J2
Functions
Definition
Line No.
Definition
Function
Common spot
+5VPOWER
+5
WRITE
WR
+5VPower
COMMON SPOT
DGND1
Control
RESTORE
RST
10
Data
DATA
DB1
11
12
Data
DATA
DB3
13
14
Data
DATA
DB5
15
16
Data
DATA
DB7
17
18
Common spot
Back light
B+
19
20
Common spot
21
22
Touching button
Touching
button KEY11
F1
Touching
F2
button KEY33
23
24
F3
Touching
Touching button
F4
button KEY55
25
F5
2-69
26
+5VPower
5.3.2 Intelligent functions

With introduction of the intelligent control system, conventional gauges and
indicators are abolished and operation, control, status monitoring, information
transmission, information display etc are intelligent as follows.
Display of
Button of
analogy
function
Numbers
Display of
function
Measuring of excitation voltage and excitation current

Computation of rotor winding temperature
Display of working status of de-exciter, including location of switch,
excitation voltage, excitation current, rotor temperature, switch performance
times, crowbar performance times etc.
2-way high-speed transmission of information through mutual connection
between CANBUS and regulator as well as rectifier cubicle.
5.3.3 measurement of the rotor temperature

Rotor temperature is measured through computation of resistance of excitation
winding as shown in the following formula.
Rf
Tf =
Rf0
In the formula,
Tf = Rotor temperature
Rfo = 0C Rotor temperature
2-70

= Resistance temperature coefficient of rotor winding materials [1/C]
The measured results of rotor temperature may be displayed on spot or remotely
and may also be used for alarm indicating.
5.3.4 crowbar
5.3.4.1 the operation principle of crowbar
Traits of different types of Field circuit breaker are considered in design of crowbar
and its triggering board with attention to mutual requirements of de-excitation and
over-voltage protection. The core component of triggering board is BOD, the major
characteristics of which is it is on-state in case voltage difference between its anode
and cathode reaches its break-over voltage, and it is interdicted when the voltage
difference is lower than break-over voltage. Besides, the small difference of
performance-regulated value is convenient for designing and experimenting.
Generally speaking, SCR initialization in rotor over-voltage protection circuit is
executed through voltage division by resistors. Its main disadvantage is that, in case of
change in characteristic parameters of silicon components, serial resistors shall be
matched otherwise to maintain certain on-state voltage, which incurs inconvenience
for maintenance. However, the adoption of BOD components in crowbar initialization
may precisely rectify over-voltage protection performance value without special
maintenance.
In the following Diagram there are sketch maps of 3 different types of crowbar
circuits. Map (a) is two SCR reverse parallel connection, which is fit for linear
resistors or SiC; Map (b) is SCR in positive direction and diode in negative direction,
which is fit for ZnO; Map (c) is 1-line SCR added in negative direction based on Map
(a), which improves de-excitation reliability.
Due to the use of crowbar, when de-excitation resistor adopts linear resistors or
SiC, it is not restricted to the use of Field circuit breaker with closed contacts.
2-71
FCB
FCB
FCB
Crowbar
Crowbar
RE
RE
(a)
Crowbar
RE
(b)
(c)
Diagram 3 types of crowbar circuits
5.3.4.2 Definition for wiring terminal and linkers on Crowbar

(1) Definition for potential device and linkers
Name
Introducing foot
Functions
X1
10PIN
Wiring terminal
X3
7PIN
Wiring terminal

Terminal No.
Code No.
Signal definition
QFG1
Linked
with
Signal explanation
the Linked to the positive pole
closed contact in the of DC220V power line-I

field circuit breaker
through the contact point,

with the DC220V power
relay coil inside
602
Linked with the negative

Negative pole of the
pole of DC220V power
602
DC power line-I
line-I
4
QFG2
Linked with the field Linked to the positive pole

circuit breaker
of DC220V power line-II
Closed contact point

2-72

relay coil inside
5
602
Negative pole of the Linked with the negative
602
DC power line-II
pole
of
DC220Vpower
line-II
7
Linked
with
DC220V+

relay coil inside
8
Same point of terminal 8,9
9
10
Terminal No
Code No.
Function
Remarks
K2
Control pole -
Trigger
G2
Control pole +
negative
the
direction
SCR to be on-state
3
K3
Control pole -
Trigger
G3
Control pole +
negative
the
direction
SCR to be on-state
5
G1
Control pole +
Trigger the positive
K1
Control pole -
direction SCR to be
on-state
5.3.5 DC transducer board

The serial number of the DC transducer board for de-exciter in the EXC9000
system is BSB, composed of the rotor over-voltage testing circuit and the excitation
voltage, excitation current signal detect circuit. The rotor over-voltage testing circuit
is used to test whether the over-voltage protection of the rotor circuit is working and
2-73

whether the de-exciter is at work, whose signals would then be sent to the intelligent
unit board. The unit board is responsible for recording and sending the signals to the
switch quantity board to cut the A-phase pulse.
The detect circuit sends the
excitation voltage and current signals to the de-exciter intelligent control board after
dealing.
5.3.5.2 Definition for DC transducer wiring terminal and

linkers
(1) Definition for jumpers, potential devices and linkers
Name
Introducing foot
Function
X1
10PIN
Wiring terminal
X2
10PIN
Wiring terminal

Terminal
Code No.
Functions
R658
Rotor
Remarks
No.
1
over-voltage To the switch quantity
protection,
cut
-A-phase board,
impulse
cut
-A-phase
impulse
01K1
Testing current signals in the Output of the current
01K2
de-exciter resistor circuit
R658
Output
alarm
of
mutual inducer
rotor Send signals through the
over-voltage protection
de-exciter
intelligent
board
5
UL out
Excitation
voltage Sample
measurement signals
de-exciter
through
intelligent
board
6
IL out
Excitation
voltage Sample
measurement signals
de-exciter
board
2-74
through
intelligent

7
COM
Common terminal for signal

testing
R602
24V power spot
R602
24V power spot
10
R601
24V power +

Terminal No.
Code No.
Functions
Remarks
UL-
Excitation voltage signal -
UL+
Excitation voltage signal +
Terminal 3, 4 short
RV1=100k resistor
circuit
RV2=100k resistor
internally, RV linked
2
3
linked
between terminal 4,5
Terminal 5,6 short

circuit
linked
internally
7
IL-
Excitation current signals
Signals are the 75mV

signals exported from
the current divider
8
9
Terminal 9,10 short
10
IL+
Excitation current signals +
circuit
internally
5.5 Conventional de-exciter

Each de-exciter mainly contains:
A field circuit breaker
A set of de-excitation resistor
A set of SCR linkers
A set of DC voltage and current transducer
2-75
linked

Conventional machinery instrument and indicator lights
Compared to the intelligent de-exciter, the conventional system is more concise in
structure and function as well. Without the intelligent controlling unit and other
corresponding testing parts, the data and signals for sampling and monitoring are
limited to a small range.
The indicators for signals are mainly indicator lights, and
the parameter such as the output current is mainly shown by machinery instrument.
It doesnt adopt the local BUS mode as other units for signal output. In stead, the
mode of relay is adopted, which, results in less information transmission and more
connecting wires among cubicles.
6. Flashing unit
The EXC 9000 excitation system adopts 2 ways of flash: generator residual voltage
flash and the external auxiliary power flash. The residual voltage flash can be
switched on and off by the buttons on the human-machine interface in the regulator.
Rapid pulse array technique is adopted for residual voltage flash. In the flashing
process, 10V~20V voltage is enough at input terminal of SCR commuter for normal
working. In case the voltage is less than 10V~20V, SCR commuter will be initialized
repeatedly (diode working mode) to reach that level. However, the residual voltage
should not be too low, or the SCR would be of off-state, which requires an external
auxiliary power for flashing.
In case residual voltage flashing fails in 10 seconds, standby excitation flashing
circuit will be activated, which is used in achieving a voltage of 10V~20V. When the
terminal voltage reaches 10% of voltage of generator, standby-flashing circuit will
automatically stop working and the soft flashing process will be started immediately
to build up the voltage to expected level. Regulators realize the whole flashing
process and sequence control is realized through the LOU board, and the soft flashing
process controlled by the CPU in the regulator.
The external auxiliary power flashing circuit only needs a small current. In
principle, in case rated excitation current is less than 2000A, auxiliary flashing current
will not be more than 20A.
2-76

The standby flashing circuit is a modularized structure made up of an air switch,
flashing contact, diode and a current-limiting resistor.
The use of air switch is for manual switch on and off of the external flashing power.
The LOU board in the regulator controls the flashing contact.
The directory diode is used to counter-block the flashing power, preventing the
over-voltage in the rotor circuit form counter running into the external DC system in
the process of flashing. At the same time, the diode plays the role of commutating the
AC in the flashing power to DC.
The limited-current resistor is used to limit the current in the auxiliary power for
flashing, preventing the flashing current from being too huge to do damage to the
external DC system.
7. External testing units of PT, CT

The external testing units of PT, CT in EXC9000 excitation system includes the
following:
(1) Generator terminal PT
Generally 2 lines of signals, YY0-12 wiring mode, 3-phase and 3-wire input,
the 1st line of PT signals corresponds to the voltage feedback signals of Regulator
A; while the 2nd line PT signals corresponds to the voltage feedback signals in
regulator B and C. It is mainly used to test feedback voltage in the micro
computer regulator AVR unit, test over-voltage limitation input signals from FCR
unit and engine set frequency and compute the active and reactive power in the
generator sets after the PT is matched with the terminal CT.
(2) Power generator terminal CT
Generally it is the No. 1 Line signal, with 3-phase 4-line input, A/B
microcomputer regulator input, and it is mainly used to measure the current
signals of the stators in the generators. After it is matched with the terminal PT, it
can be used to compute the active and reactive power in the generator sets.
Besides, it is used to limit the generator overload.
(3) System PT
2-77

Generally it is one-line PT signals, YY0-12 wiring mode, 3-phase and 3-wire
input and A/B microcomputer regulator input. It is used to measure the voltage
signals in the grid. After the comparison with terminal PT, and the function input
of regulator systematic voltage tracking, it can be used to regulate the terminal
voltage in the generator sets, so that the generator voltage can be consistent with
the system voltage, realizing automatic interconnection networking. and reducing
the interconnection impact.
8. Design of structure
8.1 cubicle structure
The cubicle is made up of front and back doors, the frame, the cladding boards
on both sides and the upper and lower base board. The frame is made of 2mm
C-shape galvanized channels with ample strength. The frame is covered with
1.5mm steel plate, which functions as separation and screening. The front door is
one-door structure while the back door is two-door structure.
8.2 Protection scale

The protection scale conforms to IEC529 and GB4208-93 standards. Protection
scales in common practice are IP21 and IP31. For the tropical climate, special
considerations have been given in designing process to casing radiation, surface
protection and seal plates etc.
8.3 Surface coating

Prior to assembly process, surfaces of the frame and steel plates are treated with
overall coating:
The preliminary treatment includes degreasing, acid cleaning, phosphining
and scouring;
Then static powder is utilized for spray coating;
The overall thickness of coating should be 40~50 with color on users
request.
2-78
8.4 Doorknobs
The doorknobs are in double keyway form and T-shape doorknobs with cylinder
locks and double keyway are available.
8.5 Main circuit

From AC input to field circuit breaker including mutual connections between
commuters up to DC output circuit, motherboard is applied.
8.6 Conducting wire

Standard tinning copper conducting wire is used. Its insulation is anti-flaming
and does not contain any PVC, which means no poisonous gas even in case of
burning. Flat cable is used for connection between printed circuit boards.
8.7 Wire sizes of the conducting wire

Standard wire sizes are as follows:
Control circuit:
1.0 mm2
Measuring circuit:
PT circuit
1.0 mm2
CT circuit
1.5 mm2
Auxiliary power supply
2.5 mm2
Power circuitaccord with international standards.
8.9 Grade of conducting wire

Grades are available on interface terminals, which are printed by special
printer.
8.10 Terminals
Open terminals are used in measuring external power supply and current
circuits with maximum wire size as 2.5 mm2. Ordinary terminals are used in
control and signal circuits with maximum wire size as 2.5 mm2.
2-79
Users guideFunction illutration
Chapter3 Function illustration

1. Regulation.............................................................................. 4
1.1 Set value regulation and running mode................................. 4
1.2 AVR and FCR........................................................................ 4
1.3 Power System Stabilizer (PSS) ............................................. 6
1.4 Manual mode of working ...................................................... 9
1.4.1 Generation mode.......................................................... 9
1.4.2 Electric braking mode................................................ 10
1.4.3 Constant control angle mode ..................................... 11
1.4.4 Short circuit dry mode ............................................... 11
1.5 Active and reactive power compensate ............................... 12
1.6 Q drop compensate.............................................................. 12
1.7 Overlapped reactive power or power factor control............ 12
1.8 Soft flashing control............................................................ 13
1.9 Tracking among channels.................................................... 14
2. Functions of the limit.......................................................... 15

2.1 Limit of force excitation and over excitation ...................... 15
2.2 limit of under excitation ...................................................... 16
2.3 Stator current limit .............................................................. 17
2.4 V/F limit.............................................................................. 18
2.5 Low frequency .................................................................... 19
3-1
3. Fault detecting..................................................................... 19
3.1 Synchronization fault .......................................................... 19
3.2 Low excitation current ........................................................ 20
3.3 Excitation transformer secondary side CT fault.................. 20
3.4 PT fault................................................................................ 20
3.5 regulator fault...................................................................... 21
4. Fault prevention.................................................................. 21
4.1 Detection fault tolerance ..................................................... 21
4.2 Control fault tolerance......................................................... 21
5. Other functions ................................................................... 21

5.1 Signals R631 ....................................................................... 21
5.2 signals R632........................................................................ 22
5.3 Output of starting command................................................ 22
5.4 Restoring ............................................................................. 22
5.5 channel tacking ................................................................... 22
5.6 Internal tracking .................................................................. 22
5.7 Systemetic voltage tracking ................................................ 23
5.8 Constant Q control .............................................................. 23
5.9 Constant PF control............................................................. 23
5.10 Manual operation of excitation incrased or decreaced ...... 24
6. Logic flow diagram of the regulator.................................. 25

6.1 flow of start up .................................................................... 25
3-2
6.2 flow of stop ......................................................................... 26

6.3 flow of main CPU programme and breaking off................. 27
6.4 flow of DSP sampling programme and breaking off........... 28
6.5 flow of channel switching ................................................... 28
6.6 flow of channel tracking...................................................... 29
6.7 flow of systematic voltage tracking .................................... 29
3-3
1. Regulation
1.1 Setpoint value regulation and running mode
The increase, decrease or preset can be controlled with input of command via
switch quantity or input of signal via serial communication circuit. The set value has
maximum & minimum limits. Regulating pace of setting value may be set through
software.
There are two setting units in the regulator, namely voltage setting unit and current
setting unit, for constant generator voltage regulation and constant excitation current
regulation. When the regulator receives the command of stopping signal, it sets the
setting value at the minimum limit, while it sets the value at the initialization value
when it receives the command of start up. The manual operation of increasing or
decreasing excitation is to directly regulate the setting value, through which to
regulate the generators voltage or the reactive power.
Constant generator voltage regulation is called automatic regulation and constant
excitation current regulation, manual regulation. After the generator flashing to build
up the voltage, the two regulations will keep track of each other, i.e. the standby one
tracks the working one in that the two regulating output are equivalent. The tracking
cannot be relieved by manual work.
Automatic mode is the main operation mode, which is good for enhancing operational
stability in in the system. PSS workes with the automatic mode, which helps to
efficiently, contain the low-frequent agitation of the active power in the system.
The manual mode is an auxiliary mode, which cannot be used for a long space of
time.
Once the regulator is charged or restored, it is defaulted to the automatic mode.
These two working modes can be switched manually. In some cases like PT fault
they can also be automatically switched.
1.2 AVR and FCR

The function of AVR is to maintain constant generator voltage, so its feedback
quantity is terminal voltage of generator. To render the excitation system a good
3-4

static and dynamic performance, 2-level leading/lagging correction stages are
adopted in voltage regulators. Its mathematical model illustrated with transfer
function is shown in the following diagram.
Ugd
Ug(S)
Kp
1+TaS
1+TA1S
1+TA3S
1+TA2S
1+TA4S
UK(S)
AVR
Diagram 2-1
Transfer function model of automatic voltage regulation
Explanation:
Ugd
Setting value for voltage, 1%~120%
Ug
Generator voltage for feedback
Ta
Time constant for terminal voltage

measurement
Kp
Kavr, amplification multiple of AVR
Regulator software setting
TA1
Time constant for the 1st level of AVR Regulator software setting
TA2
leading/lagging stages
TA3
Time constant for the 2nd level of AVR Regulator software setting
TA4
leading/lagging stages
UK
Control signals for the automatic
mode, ranges: 860~7600

Accessory
Generally the output control signals
control
from PSS
Excitation current regulator is used to realize the manual mode to maintain the
constant excitation current, with excitation current as feedback quantity. Its
mathematical model has just one-leading/lagging correction stage. Auxiliary control is
ineffective to excitation current regulators. The mathematical model of excitation
current relator is shown in the following diagram.
3-5

Igd
IL(S)
1+TB1S
Ki
1+TbS
UK2(S)
1+TB2S
Diagram 3-2
Transfer function model of excitation current regulation
Explanation:
IL
Excitation current, for current feedback
Igd
Setting value for current
Tb
Time constant in the excitation wave filter, Regulator software setting

no less than 0.04s
Ki
Kair, amplification of FCR
TB1
FCR leading/aging stage time constant
TB2
UK2

Control signal of manual mode, ranges:
860~7600
FCR is mainly used in testing (eg. the generator short circuit testing in the process
of equipment transportation or maintanence), or as an auxiliary/tansmit control mode
in the AVR fault or PT fault.
In order to prevent terminal ovevoltage caused by the sudden load throw-off of the
generator in manual mode, the manual mode has the function of automatically
returning to the no-load state.
In case the circuit breaker of the generator is tripped,
a pulse signal is sent to the regulator, so the current set value is set to no-load state.
If the regulator is operated in the manual mode, theres also the limit of terminal
voltage.
The voltage limit is the same with the V/F voltage limit, which can be used
to modify the regulation of software.
1.3 Power System Stabilizer (PSS)

Power system stabilizer abbreviated as PSS has the following functions.
3-6

a. Increasing static stability of power system;
b. Increasing dynamic stability of power system;
c. Amortizing low-frequency vibration of power system.
Principle of PSS:
One or two signals among Pf are used in excitation system for auxiliary
feedback control to increase positive amortizing. It neither decreases gains in voltage
ring of excitation system, nor affects transient performance of excitation control
system.
PSS is a standard software function for regulator in the EXC9000 excitation system.
The PSS we develop, adopts the accelerated power as the feedback signal (P),
efficiently pvercoming the roblem of reactive power in the single power feedback.
Mathematical model of PSS is shown in the following diagram, belonging to the
PSS2A mode.
Diagram 3-3
Transfer function model
Explanation:
V1
Electrical angle speed m
V2
Power Pe
TW1
Stopping direct current stage 1 time constant Regulator software setting
TW2

3-7

TW3
TW4
Ks2
Compensation
coefficient
for
power Regulator software setting
integrating counting
T7
Power integrating time constant
Ks3
Matching signal coefficient
Trap filter stage number
Trap filter stage number
T8
Trap filter time constant
T9
Trap filter time constant when T9=O, Regulator software setting

0output of trap filter
Ks1
Gain of PSS
T1
PSS leading/aging stage1 time constant
T2
T3
PSS leading/aging stage2 time constant
T4

PSS_uk
Valid PSS output signal
USTmax
PSS output positive limit, <+10%
USTmin
PSS output negative limit, >-10%
PSS setting in Default 40%, based on the capacity of the Regulator software setting
Power
generator
PSS setting off Default 35%, based on the capacity of the Regulator software setting
Power
generator
PSS export the control signal of PSS_uk, through the auxiliary control terminal in
diagram 3-1, introducing AVR adding contact, identical to the adding method of
feedback voltage Ug.
Through human-machine interface of the regulation, PSS can be switched on or off.
If the PSS is switched on, only when the generator active power is higher than the
input power will the PSS output be effective.
3-8

When PSS is switched off, the output of PSS is ineffective, constantly eual to 0.
1.4 Manual mode of working

1.4.1 Generation mode
In the mode of generation, there are 2 operating modes: automatic mode and the
manual mode.
(1) Automatic
mode. Such overlapping control signals as the stator current limit
Quegd, underexcitation limit Quegd, forceexcitation limit and overexcitation limit,

V/F limit VFgd, error regulating TCgd, assaccery control signals of PSS PSSgd
(PSS_uk), testing signals Testgd are increased on the base of the automatic voltage
regulator in diagram 3-1. The general control block diagram is shown in diagram
3-4. The overlapping way includes + and -.
+
+
U gd
Quegd
Qoegd
VFgd
TCgd
Test gd
UKmax
Ukauto
PSS gd
1 + TA1S
1 + TA2 S
Kavr
Ug
1 + TA3S
1 + TA4 S
Il
Illim
UKmin
Diagram 3-4
General control model at generating mode
(2) Manual mode. The manual mode adopts the standard constant excitation contrl
mode, see diagram 3-4.
In the mode of generation, the 2 modes can be chosen manually.
Should there
be PT error in the manual mode, the regulator will automatically switch the
automatic mode to the manual mode. Channels for the switch:
1) Switched to the automatic mode
a) Switch to automatic by Manual
b) PT error causes the software to switch to manual mode, then the start up
command restoring, and the system return to automatic mode
c) Recharged the system
3-9

d) The system switch its mode through other operating mode
2) Switched to the manual mode
a) Switch to manual mode by Manual
b) PT error makes the software switch to manual mode
1.4.2 Electric braking mode
Compared to the machinery mode, the electric braking mode has the adventages of
large moment, shorter time for stopping, no pollution, no limit of electric braking
speed and convenience of equipment maintenance and testing.
Electric braking is
generally put into use when the system normally stops. Inside the regulator, elctric
mode is added, matching with the external operation of electric braking and logic
circuit, so as to make automatic stop. In the process of electric braking, reglator
controls the regulation and supplies a constant excitation current for the
generator-winding resistor. Its scale can be set according to the software in use.
In the electric braking mode, the control regulation is the same with the manal
mode. The set value of current is the value of electric braking, which can be set
through regulatory software.
To the regulator, the general condition and order for entering the electric braking
mode includes:
(1) The generator has stopped de-excitation, excitation current being 0
(2) Command for eletric braking
(3) Start up command after 5s later
The general condition and order for exiting the electric braking mode includes:
(1) First withdraw the input command, the regulator is automatically inverted
to de-excitation.
(2) 5s after inversion, withdraw the electric braking start up command
(3) When the regulator measures the excitation current as 0, the electric
braking mode is off while the generation mode is on.
The necessary logic operations, in the process of electric braking, such as the close
of short circuit switch and input of external excitation power supply, are generally
finished by the special logic control circuit set by the excitation system.
3-10
The

programming of PLC is clearcut, simple, and convenient for modification according
to special situation.
1.4.3 Constant control angle mode

This is an open-loop regulation, only for the use of experiment. In the
other-excitation mode of the excitation power, the constant control angle mode can be
easily used to test the generator short circuit and test the genertor idle load
characteristics.
This mode can only be entered through thr regulator software.
To the regulator, the general condition and order for entering this mode is:
(1) Excitation current 0
(2) Entering to the constant control angle mode command through the regulatory
sotware
(3) Choosing the enforced start up command through the regulatory software
After entering into the constant control angle mode, the regulator would firstly
initialize and maximize the control output signals, ie Ukmax=7600. After this, the
control angle can be regulated through the regulatory software, or through the external
increasing/decreasing operation.
The general order for exiting the mode:
(1) First of all, decrease the excitation current to 0
(2) Choose the command of exit the enforced start up through regulatory software
(3) Choose to enter the command of normal mode through regulatory software,
which means to exit the constant control angle mode, and enter the generating
mode.
1.4.4 Short circuit dry mode

This is also an auxiliary working mode of the regulator, only for experiment. In the
other-excitation mode of the excitation power, the short circuit dry mode can be easily
used to test the generator short circuit and test the genertor idle load characteristics.
This mode can only be entered through thr regulator software. In this mode, the
control regulation mode is the same with the manual mode.
3-11

To the regulator, the general condition and order for entering this mode is:
(1) Excitation current 0
(2)Entering to the short circuit dry mode command through the regulatory sotware
(3) Choosing the enforced start up command through the regulatory software
After entering into the short circuit dry mode, the regulator would firstly initialize,
then transfers into the manual mode and set the current 0. After that, the current
setting value can be regulated through external excitation increasing or decreasing.
The general order for exiting the mode:
(1) First of all, decrease the excitation current to 0
(2) Choose the command of exit the enforced start up through regulatory software
(3) Choose to enter the command of normal mode through regulatory software,
which means to exit the short circuit dry mode, and enter the generating mode.
1.5 Active and reactive power compensate

To compensate voltage drop incurred by active or reactive power of unit
transformers and/or transmission lines, signals in proportion to static active power and
reactive power are added to the given voltage of the generator. The power back off
scope is between -15% and +15%, which is tunable.
1.6 Q drop compensate

To ensure rational distribution of reactive power between various serial
working-generating sets, deviation coeffcient function shall also be included, which is
realized by the given voltage of the generator minus signal in proportion with static
reactive power. The scope of power back off and deviation coefficient are between
-15% and +15% and tunable.
1.7 Overlapped reactive power or power factor control

The reactive power or power factor controlled can be regarded as added control of
AVR. In these two occasions, control signals root in difference between actual value
and controlled value of selected control mode. In addition, control signals work on
adding point of AVR through an Intergraph.
The working point in selected added to control mode can be set in the following
3-12

ways:
Human-machine interface;
Remote serial communication connection.
Q-Regulation Function
Cos-phi Regulation Function
P lower rise
raise
raise
rise
lower
lower
reset
Qreg
preset
pre-set
Q1
Diagram 3-5
lower
Q2
cos 2
cos 1
reset
Qcosphi reg.
Principle of reactive and power factor control
1.8 Soft flashing control

Normally, the generator excitation system is established automatically.
Soft flashing aims at preventing generator voltage overregulation upon flashing. Upon
receipt of starting-up command, the automatic preset value of the voltage is 30%.
When the generator voltage reaches more than 30% of setting value, the regulator
increases pre-set value gradually at a tunable pace until generator voltage rises
gradually to pre-set value, which can be set through regulating software usually as
idle rated value. The waveform of flashing process records on300MW generating set
site is as follows.
3-13
Diagram 3-6
Wave recording diagram in the process of soft flashing
1.9 Tracking among channels

Tracking among channels is realized through regulator software. The standby
channel tracks the working channel based on the principle that regulation output
(control signal) of the two channels are equivalent. Different from tracking inside a
channel, this tracking can be locked manually.
The automatic tracking ensures stable shift from working channel to standby
channel. This shift may be automatic shift (such as PT phase loss) or manual shift.
No matter double channels allocation or 3-channel allocation is applied in the
system; the standby channel always tracks the working channel.
3-14
2. Functions of the limit

2.1 Limit of force excitation and over excitation
RESET
None_Limit
ForceExc = 0
OverExc = 0
Limit = ForceExcLimit
IL > OverLimit
ForceCounter = 0
IIT = 0
CoolllingTime < =0
OVER_LIMIT
ForceExc = 0
OverExc = 1
Force_Limit
ForceExc = 1
OverExc = 0
ILLimit = OverExcLimit
Limit = ForceExcLimit
@ELSE
CoollingTime -= 1
@ELSE
IIT = IIT + IL*IL
ForceCounter += 1
(IIT > IITMax) ||

(FourceCounter > MAXVALUE)
ILLimit <= OverExc

CoolingTime = CoolingTimePreset
FORCE_TO_OVER
ForceExc = 1
OverExc = 0
IlLimit -= 0.1
@ELSE
ILLimit -= 0.1
Diagram 3-7
Control logic of force excitation
Explanation:
OverExcLimit
ForceExcLimit
CoolingTimePreset
ForceTime
ForceExcLimit anti-time formula: t=(I f-1.1)/(I l-1.1) *Tq

Tq in the above formula is the forcetime. When the excitation current is above the
overExcLimit, the systems begins the ForceExcLimit anti-time counting and timing
and at the same time send the alarm of ForceExcLimit signal, to lock the excitation
increasing operation. In this process, the ForceExcLimit limits the excitation current.
At the arrival of anti-time limit, the excitation current limits through the
OverExcLimit and sends out alarm signals, timing begins, till the cooling time reaches,
another forceExclimit is permitted
3-15
2.2 limit of under excitation

Que lim
Q
1
Ti S
+
-
Diagram 3-8
30%
Quegd
0
Mode of underExciLimit
The underexcitation limit adopts the curve Quelim=kue*P-Bu, in diagram 3-9.
is the actual reactive power value, the difference between Quelim and Q integrates,
and then the output Quegd overlaps to the voltage set valueUgd, the mode being the
incresing excitation mode, limiting the lowering of reactive power.
Explanation:
Kue
Slope of the underExciLimit curve Kue
Bue
Deviation of the underExciLimit curve Bue
Ti
Speed regulation of the underExciLimit Ti
30%
Maximum output of underExciLimit 30%
0%
Minimum output of underExciLimit 0%
VFgd Regulatory value of underExciLimit, added with the Ugd

The effective condition for underExciLimit is: the circuit breaker at the exit of the
generator is closed and the present reactive power is less than 0.
If the conditions are
not met, the underExciLimit is invalid.

When the underExciLimit is at work, the regulator sends underExciLimit alarm
signal, locking the decreasing of excitation.
3-16
Diagram 3-9
UnderExciLimit and stator current limit
2.3 Stator current limit

Explanation:
Koe
Slope of the stator current limit curve Koe
Boe
Deviation of the stator current limit curve Boe
Ti
Speed regulation of the stator current limit Ti
30%
Maximum output of stator current limit 30%
0%
Minimum output stator current limit 0%
Qoegd
Positive reactive power output regulatory value,

deduced by the Ugd
The stator current limit adopts the formula Qoelim=Boe-koe*P, in diagram 3-9.
3-17

is the actual reactive power value, the difference between Quelim and Q integrates,
and then the output Qoegd overlaps to the voltage set value Ugd, the mode being the
decreasing excitation mode, limiting the amplification of reactive power.
The effective condition for stator current limit is: the circuit breaker at the exit of
the generator is closed and the present reactive power is more than 0.
If the
conditions are not met, the stator current limit is invalid.

When the stator current limit is at work, the regulator sends set A (B) stator current
limit alarm signal, locking the increasig of excitation.
2.4 V/F limit

VFlim
20%
1
Tvf S
Diagram 3-11
VFgd
0
Model of V/F limit
Explanation:
Kue
Slope of the underexcitation limit curve Kue
Bue
Deviation of the underexcitation limit curve Bue
Tvf
V/F limit regulatory speed
20%
Maximum output of V/F limit 20%
0%
Minimum output of V/F limit 0%
VFgd
V/F output limit regulatory value, deduced by the Ugd
The V/F limit adopts the formula Vflim=Ug/F(%)-Uglim/100%.
Ug is the
actual generator voltage, the difference between Quelim and Q integrates, and then the
output Qoegd overlaps to the voltage set value Ugd, the mode being the decreasing
excitation mode, limiting the amplification of voltage.
The effective condition for stator current limit is: the circuit breaker at the exit of
the generator is closed, starting command is on and Ug>40%, If the conditions are not
met, the stator current limit is invalid.
When the V/F limit is at work, the regulator sends performance of V/F limit
alarm signal, locking the increasig of excitation.
3-18
2.5 Low frequency

47.5
Freq
45.0
Diagram 3-12
Model of low frequency
The premise of the low-frequent action: breaker is OFF in the generator exit,
molecular current <10%, no electric braking signal, and the startup command is ON.
When the premises are met and the generator voltage is less than 45Hz, the
low-frequent action takes place; when the premises are met and the terminal voltage is
more than 47.5 Hz, the low-frequent signals are restored.
After the low-frequent action, the control excitation system inside the regulator
inverts and sends the low-frequency alarm signal.
3. Fault detecting
3.1 Synchronization fault
The condictions for fault judgment:
(Utb+15%<Ug)&&R632&&(Utb>20%)
Ug
Generator voltage
Utb
R632
>40%generator voltage
When the 3 following condictions are met, synchronization fault occurs:

Synchronization voltage is 15% lower than the generator voltage
Generator voltage >40%
Synchronization voltage >20%
If there are 3 consecutive fixed timing regulatory cycles of the above conditions,
synchronization fault occurs.
After the action of the synchronization fault, the regulator sends out fault signals
through the I/O board, and through the communicative interface.
3-19
The locked

watchdog signal is sent out, so that the monitoring unit can detect fault in the
regulator and send out the channel shift command.
3.2 Low excitation current

When the channel is under operation, the stator current >10%&&the excitation
current <20% of idle loaded excitation current
When the low excitation fault occurs, the regulator sends out fault signals through
the communicative interface.
3.3 Excitation transformer secondary side CT fault

The channel is working, and (Ug>80%)&&(IL<10%)&& synchronization
coefficient 0
When the 3 following condictions are met, excitation transformer secondary sideCT
fault occurs:
Generator voltage >80%
Ecitation current <10%
Synchronization coefficient0
3.4 PT fault
Average
0.83Ug
Ug
Generator voltage
Ua
Generator A-phase voltage
Ub
Generator B-phase voltage
Uc
Generator C-phase voltage
Utb
IL
Excitation current
If the synchronization voltage coefficient is adjusted properly,
judgement is
made through the synchronization and generator ovltage. If the synchronization

3-20

voltage >20%, generator voltage is 10%lower than synchronization voltage, PT fault
occurs.
If the synchronization voltage coefficient is not adjusted properly, judgment
is made on the base of 3-phase voltage and the average voltage. If the generator
voltage is >10%, and any one of the A/B/C phases voltage is 83% smaller than the
generator voltage, PT fault occurs.
When the excitation current is >20% and the generator voltage is <5%, PT fault
occurs.
If there are 3 consecutive fixed timing regulatory cycles of the above conditions,
PT fault occurs, and the system would be changed to the manual mode.
If the
condictions are not met, theres 2 secondsdelay for the restoring of the PT fault. At
the same time, the regulator monitoring units would switch the regulator to the
standby channels.
3.5 regulator fault

Occurs in CPU restoring, programmes running away, DSP error, or in mode testing,
locked state signals sent out, and the generator voltage is >40%.
4. Fault prevention
4.1 Detection fault tolerance
Analogue quantity fault-tolerance and switch quantity fault-tolerance are included,
such as detection of PT disconnection, anti-conglutination of excitation increasing &
decreasing contacts, oil switch signal fault-tolerance etc.
4.2 Control fault tolerance

This includes increase excitation by overexcitation limit operation, decrease
excitation by underexcitation limit operation, anti-noload mis force excitation,
Overexcitation/underexcitation priority judgment, PSS output fault etc.
5. Other functions
5.1 Signals R631
R631 is the rated value signal of the generator voltage >10%. However, in order to
lock the errors in abnormal condictions, the current judgment conditions are added.
3-21

Operation condition: generator voltage>10%&&rotor current >4.5%;
Restoring condition: generator voltage<8%
5.2 signals R632

R632 is the rated value signal of the generator voltage >40%.
Operation condition: terminal voltage>40%
Restoring condition: generator voltage<38%
5.3 Output of starting command

Generating mode:
Performance: R631&&start up command existent
Restore: R631 restore
Electric braking mode:
No output.
Constant control angle mode:
Enforced output or widrawal through regulating software
Short circuit dry mode:
Enforced output or widrawal through regulating software
5.4 Reset
When the startup command disappears, reset operation occurs, including:
a. Automatic switch to automatic mode if PT fault causes the swich to
constant excitation current mode
b. Voltage setting value preset
c. Current set value preset as 0
5.5 channel tacking

Only valid in the generating mode, channel tracking onstate condition:
Channel tracking setup is ON&& R631 signas existent
5.6 Internal tracking

Only valid in the generating mode, the standby operation mode tracks the main
operation mode.
3-22
5.7 Systemetic voltage tracking

Conditions are:
Systematic voltage tracking function onstate, channel operated, systematic voltage
is >80%, the braker at the generator exit is off-state and the stator current is <10%.
5.8 Constant Q control

Effective conditions:
Constant Q function on state, this channel operated, the braker at the generator exit
on state and the stator current is. >10% of the rated value.
Among the stator current limiter, the force-excitation and over-excitation, if any of
the 3 functions oprates, the constant Q control can decrease excitation but cannot
increase excitation.
If the underexcitation or lowecitation current is in operation, the constant Q control
can increase excitation but cannot decrease excitation.
The constant Q control setting value can be set as the rated value through the
communicative setting, and it can also directly employs the current power value.
If theres excitation increasing and decreasing operation, PQ control rated value is
automatically updated as the current no-load value, that is to say, when the constant Q
is on state, the excitation increasing and decreasing operates on the no-load value
rated value.
Conditions for constant Q function exit: manual operation, the braker at the
generator exit is OFF or constant PF input.
Accuracy: 1%.
5.9 Constant PF control

Effective conditions:
Constant PF function on state, this channel operated, the braker at the generator exit
on state and the stator current is. >10% of the rated value.
Among the stator current limiter, the force-excitation and over-excitation, if any of
the 3 functions oprates, the constant PF control can decrease excitation but cannot
increase excitation.
3-23

If the under-excitation or low-ecitation current is in operation, the constant PF
control can increase excitation but cannot decrease excitation.
The constant PF control value can be set as the rated value through the
communicative setting, and it can also directly employs the current power value.
If theres excitation increasing and decreasing operation, PPF control rated value is
automatically updated as the current no-load value.
Conditions for constant PF function exit: manual operation, the braker at the
generator exit or constant Q input.
5.10 Manual operation of excitation increased or decreased

Excitation increasing permitted conditions: no operation of V/F limit, overexcitation
limit, force-excitation limit, and stator current limit.
Excitation decreasing permitted conditions: no operation of under-excitation limit
and low-excitaion current.
Anti-glutinous function:
Both the excitation increasing and decreasing has a 4-second anti-glutinous
function.
If a command lasts for more than 4 seconds, the operation is not valid until
the operation is restored.

If both the excitation increasing and decreasing are at normal state, and two are
operating at the same time, the operation is invalid.
3-24
6. Logic flow diagram of the regulator

6.1 flow of start up
3-25
6.2 flow of stop
3-26
6.3 flow of main CPU programme and breaking off
3-27
6.4 flow of DSP sampling programme and breaking off
6.5 flow of channel switching
3-28
6.6 flow of channel tracking
6.7 flow of systematic voltage tracking
3-29
Users guideHuman-machine interface
Chapter4 Human-machine interface

1. Regulator HMI...................................................................... 3
1.1 Brief introduction ............................................................. 3
1.2.Systemetic setup for the regulator HML .......................... 3
1.2.1 Communication setup .................................................. 3
1.2.2 Backup setup................................................................ 4
1.2.3 Standby time setup....................................................... 4
1.3 Frame introduction for the regulator HML ...................... 5

1.3.1 Key frame .................................................................... 5
1.3.2 Multi-functional selection frame.................................. 6
1.3.3 Switch quantity monitoring frame ............................... 7
1.3.4 Analogue quantity monitoring frame ......................... 10
1.3.5 Current fault alarm frame .......................................... 11
1.3.6 Fault retrospection frame ........................................... 11
1.3.7 Definition of indicator light frame............................. 12
1.3.8 Operation mode setting frame.................................... 13
1.3.9 Operation mode display frame................................... 17
1.3.10 System setup frame.................................................. 18
1.3.11 Testing frame ........................................................... 19
1.3.12 Frame of flashing..................................................... 20
2. Power controller HMI ........................................................ 21

4-1
Users guideHuman-machine Interface
2.1 Brief introduction ........................................................... 21

2.2 Frame introduction for the power controller HMI ......... 22
2.2.1 Key frame .................................................................. 22
2.2.2 System frame ............................................................. 23
2.2.4 Current fault frame .................................................... 28
2.2.5 Fan control ................................................................. 29
3. De-exciter HMI ................................................................... 29

3.1 Brief introduction ........................................................... 29
3.2 frame introduction for the de-exciter HMI..................... 30
3.2.1 Key frame .................................................................. 30
3.2.2 System frame ............................................................. 31
3.2.3 operation frame for de-excitaion switch .................... 35
3.2.4 current fault display frame ......................................... 36
3.2.5 screen saver setup ...................................................... 36
4-2

Human-machine Interface, abbreviated as HMI, is an operational interface between
user and excitation system. In Exc9000, HMI comprises three subsystems.
1. Regulator HMI
2. Recitifer HMI
3. De-exciter HMI
Which have the following characteristics.
Convenient for operators patrolling inspection. HMI has the functions of
operation parameter display and operation status display as well as fault
alarm command.
Convenient for operation. The operation components or operation images are
equipped with illustration and anti-disoperation measures.
HMI has relative independence. In case of its fault or invalidity, it will affect
neither normal working of excitation system nor basic operation of excitation
system.
1. Regulator HMI
1.1 Brief introduction
This system employs Profcae touching screen, which has the full screen touching
function, as the human-machine inteface.
Its advantage is its funcction sufficiency,
which not only is used for operation, but also for testing and maintanece, with richful
frames, sound visual effect, easy operation and status display for data quantity,
analogue quantity, communicative status and system operation.
The status of
equipment operation is shown clearly, so that the operators can master relative
operation in just several minutes.
1.2.Systemetic setup for the regulator HML

1.2.1 Communication setup
Communicative mode: RS232
Digit number: 8
Check bit: even number check, sum check
Stop bit: 1 bit
4-3

Baud rate: 19200
1.2.2 Backup setup

Backup origing address: 202
Backup registor length: 10
Back up content:
Registor address
Name
202
Deviation regulation rate set A
203
Deviation regulation rate set B
204
Quantity of recitifier
205
Quantity of temperature measures
206
Quantity of fans
207
Rated excitation current
208,209
Generator rated apparent capacity
210,211
Rated generator voltage
Backup content is not affected by power-fail.
1.2.3 Standby time setup

In order to protect the display screen of HMI, the system has a screen saver, which
temperately disappears when theres no operation.
2 minutes.
4-4
The default standby tme setup is
1.3 Frame introduction for the regulator HML

1.3.1 Key frame
Analogue display:
A) Generator voltage Ug, excitation current, generator active power P, generator
reactive power Q
The above analogue quantity is displayed in the form of percentage and its true value,
in which, the generator voltage Ugs reference value is the rated generator voltage (V);
the excitation currents reference value is the rated excitation current (A); the
reference value of generator active power P and generator reactive power Q is the
rated apparent capacity (KVA).
B) Control signal UKA in channel A, control signal UKB in channel B, control
signal UKC in channel C
Switch quantity display:
This shows partial information of the switch quantity in the excitation system.
A) Automatic/manual operation mode
B) Invertion
C) Interconnection
D) Limit
4-5

E) Force-excitation
Each switch quantity has an indicator light of status. When the lights are on, the
corresponding function is on. When the indicator automatic is on, this means the
regulator is in the mode of automatic operation, or it is in the manual mode.
When
any of the following is working, the limit light is on: the excitation current limiter,
the under-excitation limiter, V/F limit, the stator current limiter.
Click the switch quantity display area, and enter the frame of switch quantity.
Fault alarm
When theres any fault in the system, theres a red flashing indicator light. Click the
fault report area, and enter the current fault display frame.
The current fault alarm is listed on a tavle as shown above, according to the
chronological order. The thing happen first is put in the front, and the ensuing put in
the end. Operators can search the old faults in the frame of old fault recording after
the fault is reset.
1.3.2 Multi-functional selection frame

Click the botton frame selection in the frame, and enter the multi-functional
selection frame.
4-6
There are a lot of manus for frame selection, with each manu sorresponds to
different functional frames. Click the key frame botton and you can return to the
key frame.
1.3.3 Switch quantity monitoring frame

Click the switch quantity manu in the mlti-functional selection frame, and you
can enter the switch quantity display frame. At the bottom of the frame is the selection
manu, with the current selected one being red and others freen. In the middle of the
frame, the frame shows the current cotent under the current manu. As sown below, the
current manu is the switch quantity of Set A, so the display is all information about set
A switch quantity.
1.3.3.1 Frame for Set A/B switch quantity display

On the frame of switch quantity monitering, select the switch quantity set A or
the switch quantity set B, and you will enter the frame for Set A/B switch quantity
display. The green light means the operation of corresponding functions.
4-7
1.3.3.2 Frame for system switch quantity

On the frame of switch quantity monitering, select the system switch quantity and
you will enter the frame for system switch quantity display.
This frame mainly shows all the switch quantity information except that of the
switch quantity in Set A/B regulator, including the status information of power
controller and de-excitator.
4-8
1.3.3.3 Frame for excitation system communicative monitoring

On the frame of switch quantity monitering, select the communicative monitoring
manu and you will enter the frame for communicative monitoring.
This image shows the communicative status between different terminalsin the
whole intelligent excitation system.
The green lights in front of the terminal is
flashing in normal status, indicating the data exchange between terminals; if

communicative fault occurs, the flashing stops.
4-9
Attention please: this frame just shows the internal communication (the regulator,
recitifier and the de-excitator.)
1.3.4 Analogue quantity monitoring frame

On the mlti-functional selection frame select the analogue quantity monitoring
manu, and you can enter the set A/B analogue quantity display.
4-10

On the left of the frame is the display of analogue quantity and the current
percentage, and the analogue quantity real-time curve on the right. The different
quantity is shown in different colors.
The data on the left shown in color is the
corresponding amount to the real-time curve on the right. At the bottom of the frame,
one can also choose the data from channel A or channel B.
1.3.5 Current fault alarm frame

On the mlti-functional selection frame select the current fault alarm manu, and
you can enter the current fault alarm display.
Should there be any fault in the excitation system, there would be a red flashing
alarm on the display. There are 100 fault or states automatically recorded
chronologically on this frame. People can turn over the pages through the bottom of
page up/down.
1.3.6 Fault retrospection frame

On the mlti-functional selection frame select the historical fault manu, and you
can enter the historical fault display.
4-11
If there is the red flashing, thats the current fault, while if theres the static blue
light, thats the historical fault.
Based on the FIFO priciple, the excitation system detailedly records the fault
content, the occurring time, and the resolved time, without being affected by the
power-fail.
1.3.7 Definition of indicator light frame

This frame shows definition of indicator lights on the IO board in the regulator.
4-12
1.3.8 Operation mode setting frame

1.3.8.1 Frame for operation setup
The intelligent touching screen provides most of the function setup of the excitation
system.
Functions can be operated through the bottons on the screen. When the
function is working, the color of the bottons are changed, so are the characters on the
bottons.
4-13
1.3.8.2 Frame for deviation regulation setup

On the frame of operation mode setting frame, select the deviation regulation
manu, and you can enter the frame of deviation regulation.
There are 30 degrees for deviation regulaion rate. When you click the data block, a
data-input block appears, and you can set the regulation rate by selecting data on the
4-14

block.
Click confirm botton, and see if the feedback value concurs with the set
value.
1.3.8.3 Frame for manual operational mode sutup

On the frame of operational mode setup frame, select the manual operational mode
sutup manu, and you can enter the frame of manual operational mode.
When powered on, the system defaulted the manual operation mode.
1.3.8.4 Operational frame for PSS entry and withdrawal

The process of this function:
1On the frame of operational mode sutup frame, select the PSS operation
manu, and you see a window for code input.
4-15
2After input of the code (default code 9000), press the key enter.
If the code is correct, you will enter the PSS operation frame. Click the PSS entry/PSS
withdrawal botton, the PSS will enter or withdraw.
If the code is incorrect, a warning message for the code error will appear, when the
user can only click the OK botton, to return to the parent manu to re-enter the code.
4-16
1.3.9 Operation mode display frame

On the mlti-functional selection frame select the operation mode display manu,
and you can enter the operation mode display. This frame shows the current operaion
mode of Set A /B regulator.
4-17
1.3.10 System setup frame

On the mlti-functional selection frame select the system setup manu, after
correctly entering the password (default password 9000), and you can enter the frame
of system setup.
Users should select and enter correctly in this frame, or other errors may appear.
Eg.
If the rated capacity, rated terminal voltage and the rated excitation current is
wrongly entered, consequence is that the actual value of current active power, reactive
power, terminal voltage and excitation voltage will be incorrectly shown too.
(Percentage not affected).
The incorrect input of rated excitation current would affect the result of intelligent
current balancing.
The incorrect setup for quantity of power controller would lead to incorrectness of
power status shown on the HMI.
The incorrectness in entering of quantity for temperature-measures would affect the
temperature shown on the HIM.
Quantity for single cubicle fans , if wrongly entered, would affect the fan operation
4-18

on HIM.
Explanation 1: none of the setup is affected by power-fail.
Explanation2: none of the above setup affects the nomal operation of the system.
Explanation3: if the system is reset, registers are cleared, and the variables should
be reset too.
1.3.11 Testing frame

On the mlti-functional selection frame select the testing display manu, after
correctly entering the password (default password 9000), and you can enter the frame
of testing.
1.3.11.1 Frame for calibration of time and date

On the frame of testing, select the time calibration manu, and you can enter the
frame of calibration of time and date. Click the coresponing bottons and you can
enter the current time and date.
1.3.11.2 Frame for relay testing

On the frame of testing, select the relay testing manu, and you can enter the
frame of relay testing.
4-19
This function is used to test if the indicator light circuit on the intelligent IO board
is in normal state.
Click the botton of operation for all relays. If the functional indicator lights are
on, all the indicator lights on the intelligent IO board are on. Click it again.
If the
functional indicator lights are off, the lights on the intelligent IO board are normal.
Click the botton of reset for all relays. If the functional indicator lights are on, all
the indicator lights on the intelligent IO board are off. Click it again. If the functional
indicator lights are off, the lights on the intelligent IO board are normal.
1.3.12 Frame of flashing

Click the botton of flashing on the key frame, and you can enter the frame of
flashing
You can select the flashing mode: residual voltage flashing or voltage adding from
0v.
Just operate on the corresponding bottons. After selecting the mode, press the
flashing botton for 5 seconds at the bottom of the display, and you can monitor the
voltage change in the process of flashing on top of the frame.
4-20
2. Power controller HMI

In Exc9000 excitation system, a set of intelligent control system is installed in each
recitifier, which comprises intelligent detecting unit, communication interfaces, sensor,
LCD display and corresponding input and output interface circuits etc. Due to
introduction of intelligent control system and disposal of conventional gauges and
indicators,
operation,
control,
status
monitoring,
information
information display etc of power controller are intelligentized.
4-21
transmission,
2.2 Frame introduction for the power controller HMI

2.2.1 Key frame
Analogue quantity display: on this frame, there is display of current in 6 bridge

arms, total current in this power controller, and the wind temperature.
Switch quantity display:
the switch quantity shown on this frame: inpulse
input of this controller, fan A/B on and off, fast fuse, resistor capacity error and
input status for current balancing.
Function operation: there are 5 function bottons on this frame, in which F1/F2
are used to operate the fans A/B. Eg.
When the function display botton F1
shows A stop, click F1, and the operation of fan A stops. At the same time,
botton F1 shows A start.
Botton F3 is used to enter the system
Botton F4 is for fault resetting, in the power controller system, fan power fault
is automatic.
Botton F5 is to show flashing of fault. If there is anything wrong with the
power controller system, this botton would flash, and at the same time click it to
enter the fault display, so as to check the problems. If everything is all right in
the power controller, the botton would not flash and the click of it leads to no
operation.
4-22
2.2.2 System frame
Select sysem on the key frame, turn on the switch 1 on the power controller
intelligent board, and you will enter the system frame.
On this frame, the following
testing items are to be chosen from.
2.2.2.1 Excitation current calibration frame

Select excitation current calibration on the system frame, and enter the excitation
current calibration frame.
In this process, just follow the direction on the screen step by step.
4-23
2.2.2.2 Current balancing calibraton frame

Select current balancing calibraton on the system frame, and enter the current
balancing calibraton frame.
Turn on the switch 1 on the power controller intelligent board, which means the
function of intelligent current balancing is on state. Current balancing calibraton is
valid only after the current balancing is on state.
On this frame, the bottons F2, F3 are for positive bridge are calibraion while F4, F5
are for negative bridge arn calibration.
4-24
2.2.2.3 Selection frame of Hall parts installation direction

Select selection frame of Hall parts installation direction on the system frame,
and enter the following frame.
Way of judgment 1: each Hall part has an arrow on the head.
If the arrow
direction is the same as the actual current direction, this means positive installation,
otherwise it is negative installation.
Way of judgment 2: face the outlet terminal of Hall parts, if the actual current runs
in from behind of the outlet terminal and out from the outlet terminal, this is the
positive installation.
2.2.2.4 Wind temperature calibration frame

Select wind temperature calibration 1 or
wind temperature calibration 2 on
the system frame, and enter the corresponding frame.
4-25
2.2.2.5 Main fan selection frame

Select main fan selection on the system frame, enter the frame and select the
main fan.
2.2.3 Judgement value setting frame

Press F3 and F4 at the same time, and let go of F4 first, you can enter the
judgement value setting frame.
4-26
2.2.3.1 Wind temperature judgement value setup frame

Select wind temperature judgement value setup on the judgement value-setting
frame, and enter it.
You can set the alarm value when the wind temperature is too high (default value
50 degrees) and the return value (default value 45 degrees).
Explanation 1: if set value=reurn value=0, theres no alarm signal.
Explaaiton 2: if set value<return value, the system employs the last set value and
return value as the default value.
4-27
2.2.3.2 Current judgemnt value setup frame

Select current judgemnt value setup on the judgement value-setting frame, and
enter it.
On this frame, you can set the original value of current judgement (default=200A),
bidge arm current set value (default=5A) and the inbalanced current coefficient
(default=0).
Explanation 1: when the initiative condition is set as 0, there is no judgement on
bridge arm 0 flow and current inbalance.
Explanaton 2: when the current inbalance coefficient is 0,theres no judgement of
current inbalance.
Explanation 3: when the contrller current >the initially set value, Ug>40%, and
bridge arm current <the set value of bridge arn 0 flow, there would be corresponding
signals for brige arm 0 flow.
Attention 4: when the contrller current >the initially set value, Ug>40%, and the
controller current/(3*maximum bridge arm value)<inbalanced current coefficient,
there would be judgement of current inbalance.
2.2.4 Current fault frame

If theres anything wrong with the power controller system, click the botton fault
on the key frame, and you can enter the frame of current fault display.
4-28
Possible faults testable are: fan A/B power fault, fast fuse, resistance-capacitance
fault, over-tempreture of wind, flow block in the 6 bidge arms, current inbalance and
pulse exit of this controller.
2.2.5 Fan control

Manual switch of fans: operated on the key frame.
Automatic switch of fans: if there is a start up command, or I1>100A, the
system would automatically start the fans. If there isnt a start up command or
I1<50A, the system would stop all the operation of fans after a certain time delay.
When theres something wrong with the main fans, the system automatically start the
standby fans and stops the main ones.
2.2.6 Screen saver setup

Screen saver time 2 minutes. When the screen saver is at work, theres no switch of
frames.
3. De-exciter HMI
In de-exciter, a set of intelligent control system is installed, which comprises same
major hardware with that of power controller, such as intelligent detecting unit, LCD
display and corresponding input etc. Due to introduction of intelligent control system
4-29

and disposal of conventional gauges and indicators, operation, control, status
monitoring, information transmission, information display etc of de-exciter are
intelligentized.
3.2 frame introduction for the de-exciter HMI

3.2.1 Key frame
Analogue quantity display:on the frame of de-excitator, theres such quantity

display as excitation current, excitation voltage and rotor tempreture, in which the
excitation current and voltage is shown in the form of gauges.
Performance counting: Performance of de-excitation switch and BOD are
monitored and counted with I/O interface. The data will be written into FLASH,
which will not be lost even in case of system power fault.
Switch quantity display: the switch quantity shown on the frame includes:
de-excitation switch, de-excitation switch error, loss of AC and DC, over-voltage
protection.
Function operation: there are 5 operation bottons on the key frame, in which F1
is ued to switch on /off the de-excitater;
F2 is used to clear the over-voltage protection
F3 is of no use here
F4 is used to enter the system
4-30

F5 is to show flashing of fault. If there were anything wrong with the de-excitater,
this botton would flash, and at the same time click it to enter the fault display, so as to
check the problems.
If everything is all right in thede-excitater, the botton would not
flash and the click of it leads to no operation.
3.2.2 System frame
Select sysem on the key frame, turn on the switch 1 on the de-excitater intelligent
board, and you will enter the system frame. On this frame, the following testing
items are to be chosen from.
3.2.2.1 frame for excitation current calibration

Select excitation current calibration on the system frame, and enter the excitation
current calibration frame.
4-31
3.2.2.2 frame for excitation voltage calibration

Select excitation voltage calibration on the system frame, and enter the
excitation voltage calibration frame.
3.2.2.3 frame for rotor temperature calibration

Select rotor temperature calibration on the system frame, and enter the rotor
temperature calibration frame.
Use the directory keys and +/- keys to input the rotor temperature calibration value.
The designers provide the value.
4-32
3.2.2.4 frame for excitation ammeter range selection

Select excitation ammeter range selection on the system frame, and enter the
excitation ammeter range selection frame.
The ammeter has a range of 5 spans: 1000A, 1500A, 2000A, 3000A, and 4000A.
By the keys of +/-, you can make the choice of the above, which would be shown on
the screen, too.
3.2.2.5 frame for excitation volt gauge range selection

Select excitation volt range selection on the system frame, and enter the
excitation volt range selection frame.
4-33

The volt gauge has a range of 4 spans: 200V, 300V, 500V, and 750V. By the
keys of +/-, you can make the choice of the above, which would be shown on the
screen, too.
3.2.2.6 frame for rotor temperature alarm value setup

Select rotor temperature alarm value setup on the system frame, and enter the
rotor temperature alarm value setup frame.
On this frame, you can set the alarm value (default value=0) and the returned value
(default value=0) when the temperature is too high for the rotor.
Explanation1: when the set value=returned value=0, the LCD just shows the
4-34

temperature without the alarm.
Explanation2: when the set value< the returned value, the system employs the set
value and returned value last time as the default value.
3.2.2.7 frame for rotor temperature output calibration

Select rotor temperature output calibration on the system frame, and enter the
rotor temperature output calibration frame.
Enter the current DA40O voltage. That is to say, the system can transform the
temperature signal into voltage signal, and at the same time, users can get the rotor
temperature signal according to their needs.
The ranges for the rotor temperature output voltage is 0~5 V, with the
corresponding temperature range as 0~260 degrees.
3.2.3 operation frame for de-excitaion switch

Select operaton on the key frame, and enter this frame.
to switch on and off the de-excitater switch.
4-35
Key F3 and F4 are used
Explanation: interconnection leads to no operation of this frame.
3.2.4 current fault display frame
If theres anything wrong with the power controller system, click the botton fault
on the key frame, and you can enter the frame of current fault display.
Possible faults testable are: loss of AC, loss of DC power I, loss of DC power II,
overvoltage protection,and wrong location of de-excitater switch.
3.2.5 screen saver setup

Screen saver time 2 minutes. When the screen saver is at work, theres no switch of
frames.
4-36
User manualRegulation software
Chapter5 Debug software

1.Introduction......................................................................................2
1.1 Purpose: ....................................................................................2
1.2 Background...............................................................................2
1.3 Characteristics of thesoftware...................................................2
2. Operation environment ..................................................................3
2.1 Hardware...................................................................................3
2.2 Surpporting software ................................................................3
3.Usage .................................................................................................3
3.1 Installation and unloading.........................................................3
3.2 Connected with the regulator....................................................4
3.3 Explanation of the intereface ....................................................5
3.4 System function ........................................................................6
3.5 monitoring of analogue quantity.............................................10
3.6 Monitoring of status quantity..................................................13
3.7 Modifcation of the parametere................................................14
3.8 Command delivery..................................................................23
5-1
1.Introduction
1.1 Purpose:
This book is suited for the engineers who commission and maintain the EXC9000
regulator, mainly introducing the software and hardware requirements, software
functions, system parameter diagram and command list. Through the detailed
information of the functions, the readers will be able to operate correctly the Debug
Software, so that proper debugging and testing will be possible in the process of
production.
1.2 Background
This book is about EXC9000 Debug software version V1.0 , abbreviated as
Debug.Debug is used in the Guangzhou Electric Apparatus Research Institute
Guangzhou Kinte Electric Control Co., Ltd.
1.3 Characteristics of thesoftware

Debug uses the communication interface provided by EXC9000 system, to provide
a visible interface between the users and the regulator, which makes convenience for
users to regulate the parameter and test the excitation system.
Its characteristics:
a) With consummate ondoscope functions. It can simultaneously show 11 lines of
analogue signals, each of which has such functions as independent switch,
color setting, scaling and parellel move. Each analogue channel has the storing
depth of 6500points and 10ms/point distinguishability.
The richful wave
memerization helps to store the wave as data file, sigle color wave and colorful
wave BPM files.
b)Parameter manipulation.
The software can upload , down load the EXC9000
excitation parameter table. The parameter table can control the version, which
can automatically check the validity of the parameter. Each parameter has a set
of constraint conditions, which can effectively prevent input of wrong
parameters.
Division of parameters helps to figure out the particular data

5-2

from large amount of parameter tables. The comparson of parameter helps to
compare the current parameter with the default one and the ones that are stored
in the files. Parameter memery transfer helps to transform the parameter into
data file or text file.
c) Command interface. Users, if using Debug, can easily control the EXC9000
excitation regulator for different operations, including the mode switch, step
testing, set the triggering condition for event recording and oscilloscope.
d)Programmin function update. Matched with the EXC9000 regulator, the software
can download different files to the regulator, to update the regulator software.
e) Written in C++ language, and designed to face the subject, the software raise the
redibility and maintainability.
2. Operation environment
2.1 Hardware
The minimum setup for the system operation:
a) Intel PM processor 1.0G
b) With a disk storage capacity of 16 MB
With an internal storage capacity of 256MB
With a serial communication interface
2.2 Surpporting software

The operation needs the surpporting operation system Win98/2000/XP.
3.Usage
3.1 Installation and unloading
Doule click the program installation icon, and the installation is finished
automatically.
The erection sequence would be stored in C:\Program Files\GZDKS\Debug. There
are in all 6 files:
Debug.exe
Main program
Debug.cfg
Users configuration files

5-3

Exc9001.cef
Version control files
Exc9001.mdl
Mode configuration files
Avr.bmp
Avr picture mode
Pss.bmp
Pss picture mode
3.2 Connected with the regulator

Regulator connects with the debugging computer through the interface RS232.
The wring terminals are DB9-MALE, adopting the 3-line system, ie. Line No.2, 3 and
5. They connect like this:
If the debugging computer hasnt got the serial interface, USB/RS232 serial can be
used as the serial expansion. Through the device handler, users can check the name of
the devices.
Users choose the corresponding serial No.. In the communication
device of the debug software.
5-4
3.3 Explanation of the intereface
The interface can be devided into:

1) Menu: providing different operation function interface
2) Waveform indicator. : Showing the analogue quantity information, setting
the channel colors, location modification, and time distinguishability
modification.
3) Parameter list:
showing the system parameter , through double clicking
a certain parameter or press enter after selecting an item, users can

enter the parameter modification interface.
4) Parameter set selection: for the sake of covenient observation, users can
make the parameter list showing just the selected parameter set through
the parameter set selection.
5) Command area: users can select a certain command, and control the
operation of the regulator.
6) Event recording: showing the time of occurrence and restorage of certain
events, with sound alarm.
5-5

7) Status quantity information area: in all 16 of such areas. Each of them can
be set as a certain status quantity among the 48 in the regulator.
3.4 System function

Menu
Explanation
Connection
Open the serial interface, connected with the regulater. Data

received from the regulator.
Disconnection
Close the serial interface. All communication between the

debugging software and regulator invalid.
Command lock
In the status of lock, debugging software doesnt allow users to send

command to the regulator.
Program download
Enter the interface of downloading.
Download cancel
The command debugger restart, the original program is used. The

downloaded program will be cancelled.
File updated
Command debugger stores the downloaded files and perform the

attatched command as well as the downloaded debugging program.
Loading
configuration Down Load the personal software configuration information such as
information
Storing
color, location and so on.

configuration Store users personal configuration information
information
Configuration information Store users personal configuration information to other files
saved as
Communication setup
Set up the serial password for connection with the regulator
Communication status
Show the received data quantity and version number of the regulator
Exit
Exit the debugging software
Way to download the program:

Click the following menu, a dialog box appears:
5-6
If the debugging program has exited, at the state of receiving, please click yes,
otherwise click no. Refer to the following instruction to exit the debugging
program.
In the process of debugging, the download function is unavailable. Only when the
programme is not in operation, can there be program download.
If users exit the
debugging program and start the receiving function, the switch quantity board DO No.
1 light will be flashing.
Way to exit the debugging program:
1) Make sure the debugging software is interconnected
2) Make sure the debugging software is in the command enable state. If it is
locked, please click command lock so as to switch the debugging software
to the enable state
3) Select 30000 debugging operation exit command, and click Excute.
4) Wait for the No.1 light on the debugging switch quantity board to flash
5) The debugging software program exits.
After users select yes, a dialog box appears:
5-7
In the box File to download, fill in the absolute route and the file name, or click
the botton brows to select the file to be down loaded. The program itself would
fill in the absolute route and file name in the box file to download.
The commissioning software take the downloaded file as the default regulatory
program, so the target name is avr.exe, which makes it not necessary to rename the
file.
Only with the manufacturers authorization can the pragramme be updated.
When the ownloading is finished, the regulator is still at the state of receiving, the
debugging software would present a dilogue box inquiring whether to save the file
immediately. If the user chooses yes, the regulator saves the file, and exits the
receiving process to execute the regulatory program.
If the user chooses no , the
regulator is still receiving, enabling the computer to continue downloading.
When
the download is finished, the users have to execute the update file execution menu
to save the file; or the users can click cancel not to save the program.
After the above 2 operation, please wait for the regulator to initiate and load file.
Users have to wait longer if the program is canceling the file downloaded.
Operation
Explanation
Reference line
Single-Click the small triangle, and the reference line is in

the state of tracking. Move the mouse, and the reference line
is moving according to the mouse. When it reaches the
target place, single-click the mouse again, and the reference
5-8

line stay at the taget place.
X-axis scaling
Sigle-click + so that the picture can be enlarged along the

X-axis, while sigle-click -, the picture can be reduced
along the X-axis.
Range: 64~0.25
X-axis horizontal move
The large amount of data requires the slide move to check

the former data recorded. Sigle-click the prismatic area, then
move the mouse, and confirm the location with another
sigle-click.
Channel selection
Sigle click the left key of the mouse to choose the channel
label. If chosen, the label would be enclosed in a rectangle
with round angles.
The above picture shows that Ug has
been selected.
Y-axis pantograph ratio
Click + or - so that users can change the pantograph

ratio of the Y-axis. Double click the numbers, and a dialogue
box appears in which users can directly input the numbers.
The ratio is shown on the right most end of the curve.
Y-axis scaling reference
The triangle on the right of the screen controls the scaling

reference.
Channel display switch
Click the rectangle box in front of the channel label and

make the channel hide or appear
Channel color set
Double click the left keys of the channel label so as to get

the color selection box; users can set the channel colors.
Power
display
coefficient After the display of enforced power coefficient, T2 in the

11th channel is the current power coefficient, which is
counted on the basis of P,Q value
5-9
3.5 monitoring of analogue quantity
Menu
Explanation
Open
Open the data files, the recorded wave would be shown on the
ondoscope area. The ondoscope is in the state of pause.
Save as bitmap
Save the current area as bitmap. Users can set the BMP type and add
comments in the dialogue box.
5-10
Colorful black background

Colorful white background
Monochromatic
Save as data files
Copy
the
Save all the data to disks for future reference.
picture
as To copy the content into the internal storage as the referent pictures.
reference picture
Hide/show
the
reference To switch show and hide of the referent picture.
picture
Switch the location of the To switch location of the reference pictures.
reference
picture
(front/back)
5-11
Setup for the swich quantity The corresponding status quantity of the 16 status in the switch
display
quantity display area
Pause/continue
Refurbish of the wave forms

Pause: ondoscope stops receiving new data and the internal data
remain unchanged
Continue: ondoscope receives new data
Clear the picture
Clear all the data in the buffer area of the debugging software. After
this operation, all the data turn to 0 in this buffer area
Data Recording point
Record all the new data point buffer area
Point to Show all the data
To spring out all the data point recorded in the dialogue box, and
save the ordinary files as well as the Matlab files.
Clear all the points of data
Clear all the data points in the buffer area
Show the power coefficient
To make and show T2 as the power coefficient based on the PQ
5-12
3.6 Monitoring of status quantity
Users can set the display content of each status quantity here.
5-13
3.7 Modifcation of the parametere
If the paraeter is in the state of lock, when douvle click the parameter list, the
parameter
modification
dialogue
box
would
not
appear.
Execute
parameter->parameter lock, and switch the state of locked and unlocked. When
theres a in front of parameter locked , the modification of parameter is invalid
because the parameter is locked.
When the debugging software is on-line, new parameter will be transported to the
regulator immediately as default value. The regulator will control according to the
new data. When the debugging software is offline, users can modify the parameter but
the parameter could not be sent to the regulator.
Meun
Explanation
Open
Open the parameter files, read the parameter and refurbish data
Save as
Save the data to disk
Upload
Read the operational parameter in the regulator
Download
Download the data to the regulator, but no written into FLASH, file
5-14

loss if power off
Download
Download the data to the regulator, written into FLASH,
default
value
Comparison Compare data in the parameter and that in the disk, show the results
of
parameters
Compares
Compare data in the parameter and the defalt value, show the results
with default
parameter
Parameter
Swith status of parameter lock. If it is locked, no modification
locked
available.
Description
Set the escription characters in this parameter, with the content saved
in the parameter fles.
Information
Show the description of the parameter
AVR
Directly modify parameter in the model illustration
PSS
Directly modify parameter in the model illustration
5-15
Parameter list:
In
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Name
Kilo
Kpow
Kig
Kil
Kug
Kus
Kc
Kutb
Kab
Kv1
Kv0
Un P
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
3
0
4
4
4
4
4
0
Gro
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
0
103
103
103
103
103
0
Dft
0.500
5.760
2.400
3.500
2.400
2.900
0.880
0.000
0.000
100.0
1.000
0.000
-0.400
-0.300
-0.200
-0.100
0.000
0.000
Min
0.250
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
1.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-1.000
-1.000
-1.000
-1.000
0.000
0.000
Max
0.750
32.00
32.00
32.00
32.00
32.00
32.00
32.00
32.00
1000.
2.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Description
No-loaded excitation parameter
Power factor
Stator current parameter
Excitation current parameter
Generator voltage parameter
System voltage parameter
Adjustment of A/B tracking
Synchronization voltage paramenter
Adjustment of tracking A/B
Ratio of angle velocity
Ratio of noise
P=0,Value of permitted reactive
P=25% Value of permitted reactive
0
18
TSD1
0 101
0.000
0.000
0.000
PSS output
UK
1
5-16
PSS_
PSS_0 PSS midst variable

2
V0
Noise
V2
Analgoue V2
10 V3
Analgoue V3
11 Us
12 Utb
In-phase voltage
13 Deg
Power Angle
14 Freq
Angle frequency
15 Ua
Set A voltage
16 Ub
Set B voltage
17 Uc
Set C voltage
18 Ig2
Generator current
19 Uka
UKA
20 Ukb
UKB
21 Ukc
UKC
22 V/F_
Output of V/F limit
Gd
23 ILLim
Value
it
current
24 UE_G
Output
26 TC_G
5-17
excitation
of
underexcitation limit
25 OQ_G Output
d
of
of
reactive
power
Output of diversion

d
27 PID_
PID preset
Gd
28 PSS_
PSS power
V2
29 Ug
No equalize testing Ug
30 PSS_
PSS angle velocity
V1
19
TSD2
0 101
0.000
0.000
0.000
The same with TSD1
20
Record 1
0 201
0.000
0.000
0.000
Fixed in Debug, cant change
21
Record 2
0 201
0.000
0.000
0.000
22
Record 3
0 201
0.000
0.000
0.000
4 101
0.100
-1.000 1.000
Preset value of constant reactive power
3 101
0.500
0.200
Preset value of constant factor PF
2 101
0.000
0.000
PQ
p.u
23
controll
.
preset
PPFcontro
24
1.000
ll preset
30000
25
Jump time
.000
Jump
26
2 101
0.000
value
27
0 0
20.00
10 instead rated generator voltage which
jump variable is 10%Un
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
7600.
860.0
7600.
000
00
000
Constant
controll
28
0 101
angle
preset
29
0 0
0.000
0.000
0.000
30
0 0
0.000
0.000
0.000
31
0 0
0.000
0.000
0.000
5-18

32
0 0
0.000
0.000
0.000
33
0 0
0.000
0.000
0.000
3 102
6.000
0.000
30.00
34
T7
Integral time constant of power

0
35
T8
3 102
0.000
0.000
2.500
Time constant of wave
36
T9
3 102
0.100
0.000
2.500
Time constant of wave
37
0 102
5.000
2.000
5.000
Times of wave
38
0 102
1.000
1.000
4.000
Times of wave
39
TW1
3 102
2.000
0.100
30.00
S
Isolated DC time constant

0
30.00
40
TW2
3 102
2.000
0.000
Isolated DC time constant

0
41
42
TW3
TW4
3 102
3 102
2.000
0.000
30.00
Door-controlling units and changing time
constant
30.00
Door-controlling units and changing time
constant
0.000
0.000
30.00
43
KS1
3 102
4.000
0.000
PSS plus
0
44
KS2
3 102
0.620
0.000
5.000
Plus coefficient of power Integral calculation
45
KS3
3 102
1.000
0.000
5.000
Signal matching coefficient
46
T1
3 102
0.190
0.000
2.500
Beyond time constant
47
T2
3 102
0.020
0.000
2.500
Lag time constant
48
T3
3 102
0.300
0.000
2.500
Beyond time constant
49
T4
3 102
0.030
0.000
2.500
Lag time constant
50
Xe
3 102
0.000
0.000
1.000
51
Xq
3 102
0.700
0.000
1.000
4 102
0.050
0.000
0.100
p.u 4 102
0.400
0.000
0.900
PSS limit p.u

52
value
53
PSS
5-19

in-power
PSS
p.u
out-power
54
55
4 102
0.350
0.000
0.900
0 0
0.000
0.000
0.000
0
Active power
Reactive power
Ug
Generator voltage
Uk
Controlling signal
Uk_2
Controlling signal
PSS_U
PSSoutput
56
DAC0Sel
0 101
0.000
0.000
PSS_0
PSS midst variable
PSS_1
PSS midst variable
PSS_2
PSS midst variable
PSS_3
PSS midst variable
10
PSS_4
PSS midst variable
11
PSS_5
PSS midst variable
12
PSS_6
PSS midst variable
13
Ugd
Preset of voltage
14
Igd
Preset of current
15
V[0]
Noise signal
16
Square
Testing wave
17
PSS_V
PSS power
0.000
2
18
PSS_V
PSSangle volecity
1
57
58
59
60
DAC0K
DAC0B
DAC1Sel
DAC1K
3
0
0
3
101
101
101
101
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
61
DAC1B
0 101
0.000
0.000
30.00 DAC0 plus

30000 DAC0 offset
0.000 The same with DAC0SEL
30.00 DAC1plus
30000
5-20
DAC1 offset

62
63
64
65
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
3 103
5.000
0.000
Soft rising
66
S
time
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
30.00
Soft rising timeT30~90
0
Mannul
67
setting
v/s
3 103
1.000
0.100
2.000
time
Regulatio
68
10.00
Ms 0 103
n cycle
20.00
5.000
0
11.00
69
Kavr
2 103
Regulation cycle is 5 or 10
0
320.0
0.000
0
AVR magnify multiple

00
The 1st beyond time constant
70
TA1
3 103
0.000
0.000
2.000
71
TA2
3 103
0.000
0.000
2.000
The 1st lag time constant 0<TA2<=TA1
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
TA3
TA4
Kair
TB1
TB2
Tb
s
s
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
103
103
103
103
103
103
0
103
103
1.000
4.000
5.000
1.000
4.000
0.000
0.000
15.00
10.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.100
0.100
10.00
30.00
320.0
10.00
30.00
2.000
0.000
30.00
30.00
The sec beyond time constant

The sec lag time constant
Magnify multiple of mannul regulation
Beyond time constane of mannul regulation
Lag time constant of mannul regulation
Excitation current filter time constant
81
excitation
4 103
1.100
0.000
1.200
Underexctation limit value
4 103
1.800
0.000
2.200
Tc
Tvf
Uder
s
s
s
Devision time constant

V/F limit time constant
p.u
.
value
Force
p.u
excitation
82
Cooling
83
100.0
s
0 103
time
30000
The shortest time between two times
.000
forceexctation.
1.000
00
V/F limit p.u

84
4 103
voltage
1.100
0.000
1.500
.
5-21

30.00
85
Kue
3 103
0.000
0.000
Underexcitation limit value K

0
86
Bue
87
Ti
3 103
0.000
0.000
3 103
0.000
0.000
1.000
Underexcitation limit valueB
32.00
Underexcitation limit and over reactive
power limit speed
32.00
88
Koe
3 103
0.000
0.000
Over reactive power limit value K

0
32.00
89
Boe
3 103
0.000
0.000
Overexcitation limit value B

0
-15.00 15.00
90
Devision
0 103
0.000
TC
0
0
1.000
Powerbrak
91
4 103
0.400
0.000
0 103
0.000
0.000
Stator current preset in electric brake station
epreset
The
biggest
92
30000
s
forceexcit
.000
ation time
93
0 0
0.000
0.000
0.000
94
0 0
0.000
0.000
0.000
4 103
1.000
0.050
1.200
0 0
0.000
0.000
0.000
0 201
0.000
0.000
0.000
Dont change place in Debug programe.
0 201
0.000
0.000
0.000
Voltage
95
preset
96
Filter
97
trigger
condition1
Filter
trigger
98
condition
2
5-22

Filter
trigger
99
0 201
0.000
0.000
0.000
condition
3
3.8 Command delivery

Select the command to be executed in the pull list box and click
execute, and the command is execued. The software provides 2
identical command list and executing bottons, for the sake of
covenient experiment: selection of 2 different commands and prompt
execution.
No.
Name
Code
Remarks
No.
0
Upload
parameter
through 101
regulator
1
2
parameter
through
and
refurbish data
Read parameter from FLASH 103
The regulator reads parameter from FLASH
as the operational parameter
as the operational parameter
Save the regulator parameter to 104
The regulator saves the current operational
FLASH
parameter to FLASH
0
0 loaded 5% negative loaded 210
Phase step testing command
2% phase step F5
Step quantity: 0 loaded=5% interconnected

=2%
Step time: 10seconds
11
regulator
4~9
10
Read
0 loaded 10% negative loaded 211

5-23

4% phase step F6
Step quantity: 0 loaded=10% interconnected

=5%
Step time: 10seconds
12
20% phase step 200ms F7
212

Step quantity: interconnected =20%
Step time: 0.2seconds
13~21
22
0
Automatic mode
303
Regulator switched to automatic mode. If PT

fault occurs, regulator will neglect this
comamnd
23
Manual mode
24
25
304
Regulator swithed to manual mode
0
Normal mode
350
Regulator switched to generating mode. Only

when the switch conditions are met, can the
switch happen, or the regulator will neglect
this command. For detailed information, refer
to the regulator explanation.
26
Constant contol angle mode
351
Regulator switched to Constant contol angle

mode. Only when the switch conditions are
met, can the switch happen, or the regulator
will neglect this command. For detailed
information,
refer
to
the
regulator
explanation.
27
Short circuit dry mode
352
Regulator switched to short circuit dry mode.

Only when the switch conditions are met, can
the switch happen, or the regulator will
neglect
this
information,
explanation.
5-24
command.
refer
to
For
the
detailed
regulator

28
PQ switched on
404
Constant reactive power in operation. The set

value is the current generating reactive power
value.
Remarks: only one of the PQ and PPF control
can be used , the latter use would close the
fomer use.
If conditions are not met for constant Q
control and constant PF control, the regulator
would automatically close the 2 cotrol modes.
29
PQ switched off
405
The reactive power control exits
30
PPF switched on
406
Constant active power in operation. The set

value is the current generating reactive power
value.
Remarks: only one of the PQ and PPF control
can be used; the latter use would close the
fomer use.
If conditions were not met for constant Q
control and constant PF control, the regulator
would automatically close the 2-cotrol modes.
31
PPF switched off
407
The constant active power control exits
32
PQ switched on
408
Constant reactive power control in operation,

set value=P.23 parameter
33
PPF switched on
409
Constant active power control in operation,

set value=P.24 parameter
34
35
0
Set the control angle
420
Only valid in the mode of constant control

angle mode. Set P.28 parametet as the current
control angle
36~39
0
5-25

40
No compensation testing F1
510
41
No compensation testing F1
511
42
Compensation testing F2
520
43
Compensation testing F2
521
44
AVR testing on F4
530
45
AVR testing off F4
531
46
PSS testing on
540
47
PSS testing off
541
48
PSS on
560
PSS force-excitation exit
49
PSS off
561
Serial connected with the PSS switch in the

human-machine interface. Only when both of
the switches are on can the PSS function be
valid
50
Forced startup
601
Valid in the mode of constantn control angle

and shortcircuit dry mode. Able to control the
regulator to uotput the startup command
51
Forced startup exits
52
53
602
Forced startup exits
0
Regulator out of operation
30000 Regulator out of operation. Used when

downloading files, to control status of
operation into the mode of receiving
54~59
3.9 Record waves

Menu
Explanation
Open
Open data files
Save as bitmap
Save the current area as bitmap. Users can set the BMP type and add
comments in the dialogue box.
Colorful black background
5-26

Colorful white background
Monochromatic
Save as data files
Copy
the
Save all the data to disks for future reference.
picture
as To copy the content into the internal storage as the referent pictures.
reference picture
Hide/show the reference To switch show and hide of the referent picture.
picture
Switch the location of To switch location of the reference pictures.
the
reference
picture
(front/back)
Check
the
recoding Check if theres data in the regulator , if there is , lock the data
wave data
Upload
the
recordng Upload the data and unlock it
wave data
Clear wave forms
Setup
for
Clear al l the data on in the buffer area
triggering
conditions
Information
Show the information of the recording wave, including the triggering

time and cause
3.10 Event
Menu
Explanation
Save
Save the event content as text files
Upload event record
Upload all the event record from the regulaor
Clear event display
Clear the content on the event display
Clear event record
Clear the event record from the regulator
Sound alarm
Upon new event, control the buzzer for alarm
Setup for recording
Monitoring the events which are selected
5-27
Users guideInstallation guide
Chpter6 installation guide

1. Brief introduction ...........................................................................3
1.1 Safety guide ..............................................................................3
1.2 Acceptance................................................................................3
1.3 Transport of packed machine....................................................4
1.4 Storage ......................................................................................5
1.4.1 Storage conditions.................................................................. 5
1.4.2 Examination during storage period ........................................ 5
1.5 Case opening.............................................................................6

1.5.1 Frame-dismantling of the packing case ................................. 6
1.5.2 Transport of the machine and casing ..................................... 6
2. Installation of casing.......................................................................8
2.1 Brief introduction......................................................................8
2.2 Casing arrangement and locating..............................................8
2.3 Examination..............................................................................9
2.4 Foundation fixing......................................................................9
3. Electric wiring.................................................................................9
3.1 Electric connecting ...................................................................9
3.2Connection of copper bars .......................................................10
3.3 Grounding connection............................................................. 11
4. Sealing............................................................................................ 11
6-1
Users GuideInstallation guide
5.Completion .....................................................................................12
6. Examination ..................................................................................12
7.Special remarks..............................................................................12
8. Repair of paint damage ................................................................13
6-2
1. Brief introduction
This chapter is involved with guide for storage, transport and installation of
excitation system, which has been compiled for qualified installers of electric
equipment. Installers shall be familiar with these documents and prevention rules
against accidents in installation by power plant! Before installation work is begun,
please read the following safety guide carefully!
1.1 Safety guide

During the whole process of installation, commissioning and maintenance relevant
safety guide shall be strictly adhered to. Before any work is started related to the
system, please read the safety guide and contents marked below.
Alarm
Before any work starts please read carefully relevant power circuit
diagram!
During installation some temporary power supply may be needed, such as
power for illumination, electric tools etc. Please supply these temporary powers
with particular care!
Please make sure all powers are off before the work starts! Then measure it
to make sure no voltage exists any more!
Do not connect any other testing device on the terminal after the excitation
powers on!
Please be careful when dealing with electronic components as static
discharge may damage the circuit!
1.2 Acceptance
Upon delivery every case shall be examined. Before the cases are opened, check if
there is any damage on exterior of the cases. In case of any damage, the case shall be
opened to examine the machine at the insurance company and the manufacturers
presence. The exterior damage shall be immediately noted down in relevant
transportation document! The damage discovered after the case is opened shall be
6-3

reported within a week to the insurance company and the manufacturer!
Important! The manufacturer will not be held responsible if no Damage
Report has been received!
1.3 Transport of packed machine

The machine shall be discharged from the transport vehicle with crane lift, forklift
or forklift truck. When the packing case is discharged, it shall be lifted in the direction
indicated by the arrow. The symbols printed on the packing case are marked in
accordance with relevant national standard. When a forklift is applied to lift and carry
the packing case, its fork shall insert in parallel into the bottom of the packing case.
Please be careful of gravity center of the packing case (with specially marked symbol)
to avoid its collapse.
The packing case cannot be opened until the machine is transported to designated
place.
Figure 1 Transport packing case
Stop
serious alarm: to avoid internal damage of the machine, the excitation
equipment should never be put up side down or falnk-side-down in the process of

transportation.
6-4
1.4 Storage
To avoid quality decline and damage of the machine due to improper storage,
relevant prevention measures shall be taken during the whole process from the
moment the machine goes into the warehouse to the moment it goes out of the
warehouse for installation.
1.4.1 Storage conditions

The machine shall be stored indoor with the original packing and be placed on a
platform or a wooden frame.
Storage workers shall exercise strict control and management of the entrance to the
storage place. Fire fighting devices and materials with appropriate models shall be
equipped with the storage warehouse and shall be kept good and useful. The storage
warehouse shall be always kept clean, dry and ventilated. The arrangement in the
warehouse shall be reasonable. Waste and old packing case shall be cleared away!
Small animals or insects shall be kept away from the warehouse lest they should
contaminate or damage the machine. Requirements to environment by storage are as
follows.
z
Allowed storage temperature -25 C to +55 C
Relative humidityno allowed condensation5 % to 85 %
Stop
serious alarm: the excitation equipment contains precision parts, so it should
be stored originately inside the warehouse and placed on the shelf or wooden frame.
Keep it dry. It is not allowed to be put outside. No exposure to rain or submergence in
the rain.
1.4.2 Examination during storage period

To ensure sound environment and quantity, regular examinations shall be made (at
least once in two months). Any minute change shall be noticed and corrected as soon
as possible! The examination shall go in the following aspects.
z
Marks
Covering and sealing

6-5

z
Dryness Mechanical damage
Cleanness
1.5 Case opening

1.5.1 Frame-dismantling of the packing case
Frame of the packing case shall be dismantled in the following procedures.
a) Dismantle top of the packing case
b) Dismantle all inner supporting
c) Dismantle side boards and clear away the sheet film
d) Check if there is any transport damage
Top
Back
T94_0168.D
Front
Bottom
Side
Figure 2 Case-opening of machine/casing
1.5.2 Transport of the machine and casing

After the case is opened, the machine shall be carried by crane lift or forklift to the
installation site. The machine shall only locate on horizontal ground surface! Ensure
that the machine does not collapse when it is moved. The machine/casing shall be
lifted with fixing ropes from the bottom (see Figure 3) or from the top (See Figure 4).
6-6

The following points shall be adhered to upon lifting the casing from the bottom.
z
Tie the ropes from the bottom!
z Size Lshall be larger than size M.

z Ensure that the ropes have enough bearing strength.
T94_0169.DRW
Figure 3 Transport with crane lift

The following points shall be adhered to upon transport with hoisting rings.
z
The angle between the rope and the hoisting claw shall not exceed 120!
Direct lifting of casing at frame strictly forbidden!
The casing can only be placed on horizontal ground!
The hoisting ring may be dismantled after the casing is installed. Screw caps shall
be put into the screw holes and sealed with resin.
Stop
serious alarm: to avoid internal damage of the machine, the excitation
equipment should never be put up side down or falnk-side-down in theprocess of

hoisting and transportation.
6-7
T94_0170.DRW
Figure 4 Transport with hoisting ring
2. Installation of casing
Generally speaking, relevant preparation work has been done as required by site
installation before it is dispatched from the plant, including wiring between cabinets,
hole opening on the bottom, sides and top etc. The illumination and channel on
installation site shall be guaranteed. In case of high humidity and wide temperature
variation scope on installation site, condensation is inclined to occur, which, by
heating on installation site, can be avoided.

Installation of casings shall be executed in the following steps.
a) Casing arrangement and locating
b)
Examination
c)
Fixing of casing
d) Removal of hoisting ring bolts

e) Sealing
2.2 Casing arrangement and locating

Generally speaking, the machines shall be packed separately during transport and
cabinets shall be kept vertical all through the transport process! After the packing case
6-8

is opened as per above instructions, the casings shall be arranged one by one as per
the design allocation plan.
Before installation, check the arranged location, arranged order and direction
of the front and back doors for each casing so as to avoid wrong installation which
would lead to the impossibility to restore the parant line and wiring between casings.
2.3 Examination
After casing arrangement is finished, before fixing, all the doors and cover boards
shall be examined to make sure they can be flexibly opened and closed without
distortion.
2.4 Foundation fixing

V-iron channels shall be embedded on installation surface of the building in power
plant, on which the machine casing shall be fixed by rivet welding.
Casing
V-iron channel
Foundation
Installation frame
Figure 5 Foundation fixing

The hoisting ring and bolts can be removed and kept at a safe place as soon as
casings have been arranged and fixed reliable on the foundation!
3. Electric wiring
3.1 Electric connecting
The manufacturer has already designed electric wiring inside the excitation
6-9

machine. Upon site installation, after casings have been put in place, the wires shall be
laid and connected to corresponding terminals as per instructions of the plan.
Designing or installation unit, including signal circuit, control circuit and power
circuit etc, shall do the connections between excitation machine and other machines in
the power plant. Upon selection of cable and wire, please make sure the cable is long
enough and know how to lay it. The voltage drop increase will incur increase of
sensitivity to disturbance. The length of cable will also increase sensitivity to
disturbance.
The control cable from and to the control room is usually connected on terminal of
regulator or de-exciter. The minimum cross section of cable is specified in electric
circuit diagram.
The cable clamp or cable code for binding cable shall be installed on the bottom of
the casing to avoid overtensity of cable joints due to pulling strength. The cable clamp
is also used for cable electromagnet screen grounding.
3.2Connection of copper bars

Before connection, the user shall rub the bottoms of copper bars. The joining
surface of copper bars shall be rubbed thoroughly with soft cloth. If the jointing
surface is dirty, detergent (ethanol for example) or soft brush may be used for cleaning.
There shall not be any dirt or grease on the joining surface. An appropriate amount of
grease shall be applied evenly on the joining surface with sponge plastic pad. But the
grease shall be thin. The copper bars shall be immediately connected after that
treatment.
Screws for electric connection in various units shall be screwed down with the
moment of force stipulated as below. However, lubricating grease shall be applied
before this on their jointing parts.
6-10

Connection of copper cable and copper bars is illustrated in detail in the following
figure. Hexagonal screw gasket copper bar hexagonal cap:
Cable joint
gasket spring gasket
Figure 6 Cable connections
3.3 Grounding connection

The major grounding copper bars shall be installed on the bottom of cabinet. And
the major grounding cables shall be connected on grounding copper bars with screws.
Figure 7-6 provides a possible design.
T94_0186.drw
Major grounding wiring

Figure 7 Design of major grounding copper bars
4. Sealing
Based on protection grade required by design, gaskets shall be used for
sealing on joining surface of underframe of casing and the foundation.
6-11

Alarm
In case of possible intrusion of insects or dirt into the
cabinet, the open foundation shall be sealed after commissioning
5.Completion
All transport tools shall be taken away, e.g. the wooden supporting in the case if
any.
Any article not in use shall be cleared, such as packing materials or small pieces of
cable in cabinet etc.
The insulation parts shall be rubbed clean with a piece of antistatic cloth. Do not
use any solvent!
6. Examination
z
All BUSBAR connection and frame connection shall be examined because they
are disconnected during transport.
Examine foundation fixing.
Examine protection level of the machine to make sure it is satisfactory. Special

attention shall be paid to the mainframe and cable inlet on top of casing.
Also examine the appearance, completeness, marks, foreign substance, and

cleanliness.
Examine accuracy and completeness of connection and layout of cable, which

shall be done on site.
To check if the cable is properly grounded at inlet of casing (cable clamp or

sealed pipe.
To check if all the protection wires are properly and completely connected.
Close casing door.
7.Special remarks
In case of interruption of installation and wiring work, the following steps shall be
taken to protect the machine against dirt, dampness or foreign substance.
z
Close all the doors of casing.
Cover the casing with plastic film.
6-12

z
Execute heating on installation site or power on the heater in cabinet (if already
installed).
in the process of installation, if any damage was detected , contact the

manufacturer as soon as possible, to consult recoverage or supply of
related
equipment.
8. Repair of paint damage

Any damage to the paint on machine surface during transport or installation shall be
repaired before commissioning.
Only polyurethane paint can be used to repair the damaged paint surface in that
only this paint ensures tight attachment to the original paint surface.
A fine hairbrush may be used for repairing scrapes or cracks.
In case of large damaged paint area on front door of casing, the whole door shall be
painted again.
6-13
Users guideTesting regulation
Chapter7 Commissioning
1. Brief introduction ................................................................. 2
2. Safety conditions ................................................................... 2
3. Requirements with commissioners...................................... 3
4. Illustration of urgency .......................................................... 3
4.1 Fire ........................................................................................ 3
4.2 Electric shock........................................................................ 4
5. Testing environment. ............................................................ 4

6. Applicable standards and regulations................................. 4
7. Commissioning schemes ....................................................... 5
Appendix 1 Factory commissioning schemes for the
EXC9000 excitation system.................................................... 6
Appendix 2 Site commissioning schemes for the EXC9000
excitation system ................................................................... 39
7-1
This testing regulation gives detailed site and ex-factory commissioning approaches,
steps and relevant safety guide in EXC9000 excitation system. This testing regulation
is mainly compiled for plant maintenance staff at power plant, which is required to
have good knowledge of electric engineering and professional knowledge closely
related to excitation system.
2. Safety conditions
Dangerous
Take special care upon working in the control cabinet . Contact with
any electriferous part in the system may incur serious hurt. An operator is
forbidden to get into the cabinet unless he has necessary professional knowledge
and has taken protection measures
Alarm
The AC side of rectifier cabinet
secondary side
components is connected to the
of excitation transformer and its DC side is connected to rotor
winding of generator. Both have very high voltage, which will result in an enormous
short circuit current. So isolation measures shall be taken with these components to
avoid accidental electric shock. It is strongly recommended that maintenance should
not be done in case of electrification.
Alarm
Due to the reason that secondary side voltage of excitation transformer and
excitation voltage are in circuit with excitation cabinet, danger thus exists which
will, in case of an accident, result in an enormous short circuit current.
Alarm
In de-exciter cabinet, field switch and de-exciter equipment are in direct
circuit with generator rotors, so potential dangerous voltage may occur any time.
Both door of de-exciter shall be locked to avoid any intrusion into it. If the doors are
opened, please remember: this may result in a high voltage and an enormous short
7-2

circuit current.
The excitation system shall work in a well protect environment. Operators shall
comply strictly with relevant national safety regulations to avoid the following
consequences.
Personal injury and machine damage may be incurred if the safety regulations are
not adhered to.
If commissioning is not done as per requirements or only part of it has been done as
required, damage may occur, which will result in very high repair and maintenance
cost. If there are dust and dirt on the rectifier, a very high discharge voltage may occur,
which is very dangerous.
3. Requirements with commissioners

z
Commissioners shall be familiar with excitation system user guide and

functions
Familiar with this chapter
Familiar with control components, working and alarm display of excitation

system as well as excitation machine local control and main control room remote
control operation (see User Guide).
Familiar with procedures of operation, commissioning, maintenance and repair.
Clear about various commands regarding power wiring, structure, theories etc of
excitation system, power-off measures in case of urgency and how to switch off
voltage of the machine in accident.
Familiar with prevention measures against working site accident. Be able to cope
with urgency after training. Clear about firefighting procedures.
4. Illustration of urgency
4.1 Fire
Notice
Everyone shall know the whereabouts of fire-distinguisher and
the urgency exit.

There are helogen, CO2 or foam in fire extinguishers.
7-3

CO2 fire extinguishers are mainly used for fire fighting upon electric apparatus
installation, which cannot be applied to human bodies.
The foam fire extinguisher is quite efficient to fight of ordinary articles, which
cannot be used for electric apparatus but can be used for human bodies.
In case of fire in the machine, firstly the excitation shall be switched off on site or
in the control room. The machine shall be powered off if necessary (See User Guide).
Then switch off the machine power.
Only CO2 fire extinguisher can be used for electriferous cabinet. Foam fire
extinguisher or water is strictly forbidden!
4.2 Electric shock

1First excitation shall be switched off on site or in the control room. The
machine shall be powered off if necessary. (See User Guide). And then all
powers in the machine shall be switched off.
2 The wounded person shall be rescued from danger and be made to lie low
on the ground. Consider regulation concerning electric shock treatment, then
exercise orderly treatment and call for aid.
5. Testing environment.
1. Height above sea level does not exceed 2,000m.
2. Surrounding air temperature is maximum +40 and minimum -10.
3. Regarding relative humidity of air, average maximum relative humidity is 90% and
average minimum temperature is +25 in the wettest month.
4. A clean environment without explosion danger. There is no gas or electric
conducting dust in the air, which can erode metals or damage insulation. No big
vibration or bumping.
6. Applicable standards and regulations

GB/T7409.3-1997 Large & Medium-scale Synchronous Generator Excitation
System Technical Requirements
DL/T650-1998 Large-scale Steam Generator Static Self & Shunt Excitation System
7-4

Technical Requirements
DL/T583-1995 Large & Medium-scale Hydrogenerator Static Rectifying Excitation
System & Equipment Technical Requirements
System & Equipment Testing Regulations
System & Equipment Installation & Acceptance Regulations
System & Equipment Working & Overhauling Regulations
7. Commissioning schemes
z
Factory commissioning schemes

Refer to Appendix 1 Factory commissioning schemes for the EXC9000 excitation
system
Site commissioning schemes

Refer to Appendix 2 Site commissioning schemes for the EXC9000 excitation
system.
7-5
Appendix 1 Factory commissioning schemes for the

EXC9000 excitation system
I. The necessary conditions for commissioning
The folloewing are necessary preparation work before the factory-commissioning
scheme begins.
z
Make sure that the inastallation wire and the assembly cabenit are set, the
parent current between cabinets and wires transverse-cabinet cables, internal
data wires and pulse wires are all connected.
Attention: for the ordinary power cabinet system, the plain cables at the side of
cross-cabinet No. 22~24 should be cut off.
Make sure the double check of the wiring work, that all the model numbers
and design proposal are compatible and that all the component installation
and wirings meet the requirment
of the diagrams
Attention: focus on wiring in the main circuit, de-excitation circuit and the exctation
power circuit.
z
Make sure all the installation process compatible with the standard, and the
test for insulation and pressure endurance finished
Make sure that all the program chips are proper;y set inside the different
electric board
Lay all the cables wires connecting the testing machines and the excitation
cabinet, and check according to the diagram of wiring, including the voltage
sensors, current sensors and circuit protection. Make sure all of them are
correctly and firmly connected.
Prepare well the instruments for testing, including: ondoscope, universal

meter, commissioning computers, programmer, thermoscope, professional
screwdriver and so on.
Prepare a blank sheet of ex-factory testing report.
II. Parameter for machine unit and the excitataion system

7-6

No.
Items
Content
Units
Name of the power plant
Unit No.
Rated capacity
Coefficient of rated power
Rated Voltage for stators
Reted excitation voltage
Rated excitation current
Rated idle-loaded
Terminal PT changing ratio
10
Terminal CT changing ratio
11
Exitaton change capacity
12
Excitation change ratio
13
Excitation change secondary side CT
MW
excitation current
KVA
changing ratio
14
Current devider changing retio
15
Quantity of the power cubicles
Purpose: to make sure the parameter in the power machine and the excitaion system
agreeable with the design, so as to guarantee the accuracy of parameters the next step.
III. The power circuit check

Before excitation charged for the very first time, all the DC/AC circuit switches
should be turned off. Pull out the panels inside the controller of reguler A and B.
Powe off the HIM, IIU, LOU, analogue quantity board, switch quantity board, power
controller intelligent board, power impulse board, de-excitater intelligent board, and
the de-excitater transducer.
Make sure checked:
Purpose: before charged for the first time, theres no way in which to check if
everything is correct in the process of internal wiring of the power circuit in order to
prevent damage caused by incorrect wiring, the above step should be taken.
7-7

Before excitation charged for the very first time, check the correctness of input
voltage relavent to AC circuit switch.
After making sure that theres no short circuit
for output power inside the excitater, turn on these operation switched.
Purpose: there is DC current voltage grades such as DC220V, DC110V, DC48V, and
DC24V in the excitation system, and AC voltage grades of AC400V, AC220V, ect.
Make sure the concordence of voltage of internal excitation components and the
contol power voltage, or the components will be damaged.
When checking if theres short cicuit at the internal power output terminal, please also
check if this power will cause short circuit to other powers, eg.whether DC220V will
cause short circuit to DC24V.
Check the voltage and polarity correctness on the 24V power on HMI, IIU, LOU,
switch quantity board, power controller cubycle intelligent board, power impulse
board, de-excitater intelligent board and the de-excitater transducer.
Make sure checked:
Check the +5v, +12v and 12v power terminal on the backboard, analogue quantity
board, and switch quantity board voltage and its correctness in the controller.
Make sure checked:
Make sure all the above is checked, and restore the boards and sockets, ordinary
charge.
When the regulat or is nomally on charge, adjust the 5v power-wiring terminal at
5v in the regulater A and B backboard.
Make sure adjusted:
Adjust the potential device W2 on the switch quantity board, to make the voltage in
the CK2 on this board 4.75v.
Make sure adjusted:
Purpose: the potential device W2 is used in judging the refernt level in the power fault
in the cicro-regulator. When the 5v power regulator in the microcomputer channel is
lower than the above set value, the regulator would send out alarm signals fault for
mcrocomputer power error and switch to the standby channels.
Check if the voltage transformer matches the voltage in excitation change
7-8

secondary side.
Make sure checked:
Purpose: the excitation generator machine units are based on the in-phase voltage
transformer parameter set and its corresponding input, so in commissioning operators
should double check the secondary side voltage matching with the primary side
voltage.
Record data according to the following table:
U AC (380V 15%)
U BC (380V 15%)
U AC (380V 15%)
Ex-factory power I
Ex-factory power II
DC
24DC power
Regulator power
power
For AC
Channel A
Items
For DC
Channel B
Designed
value
Actual
value
Attention: the voltage of the switch power can be measured at its external terminal.
Attention: in the test of the AC 24VDC, as the secondary side voltage in the regulator
units is lower than the actual value; it is necessary to wire from AC380V factory to
the primary side of the power voltage transformer (special alarm: the grade of the
connected wire should be matched with AC380V voltage.) and then check if the
current circuit is at normal state.
IV. Loading process

1 Check the jumper code
1.1 Intelligent system
The switch quantity board JP1 off, JP2 and JP3 short connected.
Attention: JP3 in the pumping power accumulation systemshould be off.
7-9

The diling switch keys 3 and 4 on the intelligent board should be diled according to
the address (power controller 1# is 00, 2# is 01, 3# is 10, 4# is 11).
The CAN BUS terminal electric resistor at both ends on (generally short circuit the
I/O board and the LK1 on the de-excitater intelligent board, but please check if the
terminal resistor is on at the regulator controller terminal.
With the resistors at both
ends on, the resistor of CANBUS is 60 when theres no power. )

Make sure the above operation finished:
1.2 Conventional rectifier system

The switch quantity board JP1, JP2 off, and JP3 short connected.
The diling switch keys 1 and 2 on the intelligent board should be diled according to
the quantity of the power controllers (for 1 power controller 00, for two 10, for three
01, for four 11.).
JP3 on the pulse power releasing board should be short connected.
CAN BUS resistors on at both ends. (Generally short circuit the I/O board and the
LK1 on the de-excitater intelligent board, but please check if the terminal resistor is
on at the regulator controller terminal.
With the resistors at both ends on, the resistor
of CANBUS is 60 when theres no power. )

2. Attention in the filling process

Load the effective version of regulator program and single-chip machine program
orderly with microcomputer.
Attention: before downloading the program, get off the corresponding jumper code
(K board means the power controller intelligent board, the de-excitator board or the
intelligent board: JP1, I board means the IIU board:JP2, J board means the LOU
board: JP1), or the programme cannot be downloaded.
After the downloading, turn
on the above jumper codes, so as to make the anti-interruption measure effective.

V. Calibration testing
7-10
1. Terminal 1PT, 2 PT and system 3PT voltage calibration

The 3 lines of the PT voltage are supplied by the programmable power. When the
input voltage is the rated value, regulate the voltage coefficient ID [4] at the machine
terminal, so as to make the displayed value at the terminal 100.00%; regulate the
system voltage tracking regulatory coefficient ID [5], so as to make the displayed
value on the system voltage 100.00%; record data according to the following table.
Record for set A voltage calbration:
Input
Input
Display value Display value Terminal
System
voltage
voltage
of
tracking
(%)
(V)
terminal of
system voltage
voltage
voltage
coefficient
(%)
(%)
(Kug)
voltage
regulatory
coefficient
(Kus)
50%
100%
120%
Record for set B voltage calbration:
Input
Input
Display value Display value Terminal
System
voltage
voltage
of
tracking
(%)
(V)
terminal of
system voltage
voltage
voltage
coefficient
(%)
(%)
(Kug)
voltage
regulatory
coefficient
(Kus)
50%
100%
120%
2. Generator current calibration

Simulate CT secondary current with the programmable power supply. When the input
voltage is the rated value, regulate the generator current coefficient ID [2], so as to
make the displayed value 100.00%. Record the data according to the following table
after regulation.
Record for generator current calibrtion:
7-11

Input
Input
Display value Display value A
generator B
current
current
of A current
of B current
current
current
(%)
(V)
(%)
(%)
coefficient
coefficient
(Kig)
generator
(Kig)
50%
100%
120%
3. Generator power calibration

Simulate CT and PT with the programmable power supply. In the condition of
voltge reference value and current reference value, regulate the power coefficient ID
[1], so as to make the displayed value 100.00%. Record the data according to the
following table after regulation.
Set A power coefficient Kpow:
Set B power coefficient Kpow:
PT=100.00%, =0
CT
(A)
current Set A active Set A reactive Set B active Set

power (%)
power (%)
power (%)
reactve
power (%)
PT=100.00%, =90
CT
(A)

power (%)
power (%)
PT=100.00%, =-90
7-12
power (%)
power (%)
reactve

CT
(A)
power (%)
power (%)
power (%)
reactve
power (%)
PT=100.00%, =rated power coefficient angle

CT
(A)
power (%)
power (%)
power (%)
reactve
power (%)
4. Excitation current calibration

Simulate CT secondary current with the programmable power supply. When the
input currnt is the rated value, regulate the generator current coefficient ID [3], so as
to make the displayed value 100.00%. Record the data according to the following
table after regulation.
Excitation current calibration record
the reduced parameter for input current rated
value=0.816*Iln/1.1
Input
Input
Display
Display
excitation B
excitation
current
current
value of A value of B current
current
(%)
(A)
current
current
coefficient
coefficient
(%)
(%)
(Kil)
(Kil)
50%
100%
120%
200%
Attention: errors exit with this measure, in actual grand current testing, please
recalibrate according to the actual current value.
Purpose: the above test is mainly used to examine whether the analogue quantity
7-13

signal sampling and function-transmission is working well.
In the process of
calibration, operators need to simultaneously input rated voltage signal to the terminal
PT, otherwise the current calibration may suffer larger errors.
5. Preset of the exctation regulatory range at C channel

Add in-phase voltage signals.
According to the measures for excitation current calibration, add 100% rated
current, and regulate the potential device at W4 on the analogue quantity board to
make the voltage at the testing point CK1 at the right corner on the board 6.8v.
Make sure adjusted:
Purpose: the above step is the reference value forcurrent feedback signal calibration
in C channel regulator, from which operators can set the measuring range.
5.1) Check Toplimit for excitation current in C channel
Switch to channel C, increase excitation until the limit light in C channel is on.
Regulate the current to make the control signals in channel C 50%; the current value
of excitation current is the toplimit, about 120% of the rated excitation current.
Make sure adjusted:
5.2) Check lowlimit for excitation current in C channel
Switch to channel C, reduce excitation until the limit light in C channel is on.
Regulate the current to make the control signals in channel C 50%; the current value
of excitation current is the lowlimit.
Make sure adjusted:
6. Preset of the 110% voltage restraint at C channel

According to the calibration method at terminal PT, add 110% terminal voltage vale,
and switch on channel C. regulate the potential device W2 at channel C on the
analogue quantity board so as to make the display value at channel C about 50%.
Make sure adjusted:
7. Measure of R631, R639 signal value and 10%, 40% voltage

7.1) R631 on analogu quantity BUS signal value
Without excitation current
7-14

R631 signal action value:
R631 signal feedback value:
Attention: in the action of R631, No.6 signal output indicatory light would be on on
the micro compter regulator I/O board.
7.2) Record the corresponding actual value of R632 signal
Action value: Upt=
Feedback value: Upt=
Attention: in the action of R632, No.7 signal output indicatory light would be on on
the micro compter regulator I/O board.
7.3) Regulate overexcitation protection
R639 Signal Action value:
R639 Signal Feedback value:
Over-excitation protection fold:
After the over-excitation protection action, please check the correctness of the
output signals.
Make sure checked:
Attention: when the signal R639 is at work, the relay K04 inside the excitation
regulator would work, and at the same time the regulator screen and I/O board would
give telative signals.
VI. Operation circuit and signal circuit check

1. Excitation initiation operation
Handy manual:
Results :
Automatic initiation:
Results :
Attention: to see if the initiation is at normal state, operator can judge from the action
of the initiation contactor. Once the contactor is switched on, keep this state unless the
startup time is up or operator closes the initiation manually.
If the residual voltage initiation is not on, the results: 10 seconds after initiation
witout successfully establishing the voltage, the initiation would automatically stop
and sends out signals initiation failure.
7-15

If the residual voltage initiation is on, the results: 10 seconds after initiation witout
successfully establishing the voltage, the auxiliary power supply would be
automatically put into use. 5 seconds later, the initiation stops automatically and sends
out signals initiation failure.
Results:
Flashing polarity
Results :
2. Fan operation
Manually switch on and off the fans.
Normal operation:
Attention: intelligent power controller system operats the fan switch on the display
screen, while the conventional power controller system has a manual switch inside it.
Automatically switch on and off the fans.
Normal operation:
Attention: if the startup command R651 is effective, the fans would be turned
automatically.
Automatic switch of fan
Normal operation:
In the AC current line 1, fans direction check
Results:
Results:
Power plant switch
Results:
Fan operational status signal indicator
Normal display:
Attention: when the power conroller applies the A /B two fans, the direction and
status indicator of both fans should be checked.
3. De-excitater operation
Handy manual switch on and off the brake
Normal operation:
Remote operational switch on and off the brake
Normal operation:
Accident and invertion failure brake
Normal operation:
Line I breke circuit
Normal operation:
Line II brake circuit
Normal operation:
Attention: both of the circuits in the ABB de-excitater switch should be checked.
De-excitator switch status signal indicator
4. Check of illumination and heater

7-16
Normal display:
results:
5. Check of external input signals

Order
External input signals
Display
on DI lights on the I/O board
the screen
1
Increase-excitation
--
DI.1
Reduce-excitation
--
DI.2
PSS locked
When PSS is at work,DI.5

light is on, and then the
lock signal is input and the
light DI.5 is off.
Brake of Circuit breaker
DI.6
at the exit of the genertor

5
Startup command
DI.9
Stop command
DI.10
6. Abnormal phenomen test im set A and B power voltage

Regulate the output +5v power voltage in the regulator A and B respectively,
similate the situation of the abnormal low or high voltage. When it reaches to the low
limit (about 4.75v) or the high limit (about 5.25v), signal power error of reglator A
or B would be sent out, and switched to the standby channel.
Set A regulator power +5v voltage monitoring low limit:
Set A regulator power +5v voltage monitoring high limit:
Set B regulator power -5v voltage monitoring low limit:
Set B regulator power +5v voltage monitoring high limit:
After the above test, set the voltage at the wiring terminal to 5.00v.
Attention: rgulate the potential device on the micro computer switch in chaneel A and
B, which can help to regulate the power output on the regulator. When it reaches the
high limit , remember not to set the power voltage at more than 5.5v , otherwise it
might damage the components inside the regulator.
7. Check of excitation output signal

7-17

Order
Items for test
Signals
No.
Channel A operation
Channel B operation
Channel C operation
Channel B standby
Channel C standby
Constant IL regulation
Aotomatic mode
PSS input
PSS lock
10
DC Power setction I off
11
DC Power setction II off
12
AC power off
13
Switch on de-excitater switch
14
Switch off de-excitater switch
15
Switch off de-excitater switch

by mistake
Introduce
de-excitater
auxiliary switch point

17
1#power controller fast fuse
18
2#power controller fast fuse
19
Fault of 1#power controller

resistor capacity
20
Fault of 2#power controller

resistor capacity
21
Fan power fault of 1#power

controller
22
contact Signals on display
point without power
16
at
Fan power fault of 2#power

7-18
and the panel

controller
23
Error or exit of 1# power

controller
24
Error or exit of 2# power

controller
25
Set A power fault
26
Set B power fault
27
24V power fault
28
Communication fault
29
Initiation failure
30
Over-excitation protection
31
Over-excitation exit
Attention: according to the semand of users, the signals at contact point without
power may not be totally identiacal to the above signals. The acutual value should be
checked according to the special diagram.
8. Check of excitaion communication

Test the communication function of the excitation system by the BitBoy Software
and RS485/RS232.
Make sure checked:
Attention: the outlet serial communication interface of the EXC9000 excitation

system if RS485 interface. In the commissioning, the operaters need to do the test by
the RS485/RS232 communication exchange mode.
VII.
Open-loop testing
The testing machine units are testing the open loop of excitation device when the
electricity is reversely supplied.
Wiring way: from the low voltage terminal PT side, operators introduce a wire to
the wiring terminal inside the excitation cubicle, at which the 1PT and 2PT are
parrelel connected. Introduce wire from the excitation change secondary side in the
testing machine unit to the anode side of the excitater rectifier bridge, switch off the
circuit breakers at the testing machine unit and the rotor circuit, switch on the
7-19

interconnected circuit breaker, and send electricity in reversed direction, so as to
electricize the PT terminal and the excitation voltage transformer. Put a resistance
wire into the rectifier bridge in place of a rotor as the load for commissioning.
1. Preset value
Channel A preset
Channel Bpreset
Channel C preset
Attention: when the 0 voltage initiation is operable, the preset value of Channel A
and B IS 10%, while it is not operable, the preset value is 97%. When the preset is at
normal state in channel C, the preset value is the low limit of its current regulation.
2. Check the automatic channel characteristics

Without changing the preset value, the control signal in channel A and B should rise
as the PT voltage rises, and should decrease as the PT voltage decreases. The
feedback signals in Channel C are the excitation current, which remains unchanged
even the PT changes.
Without changing PT voltage, in excitation increase, control signals decrease, and
angle shrinkd; in excitation decrease, control signals increase and angle swell.
Results:
Attention: because theres the function to prevent excitation increase or decrease
points from sticking to each other, in operation of excitation increase or decrease, the
time for conneting should not exeed 4 seconds, or the command is ineffective.
3. Check the rectifier bridge wave form

Located in channel A and B, used to check the waveforms from each rectifier
bridge, with continual alteration and without mutation.
Results:
Attention: when there are more than 2 rectifier bridges in the system, separate check
for each rectifier bridge is necessary. At the same time, cut the AC current input or
triggering pulse in the rest of the rectifiers.
4. Check test for channel C

7-20

Short connected the JP1 on analogue quantity board by jumper code, switch to
channel C, and observe the waveforms from the rectifier. The operation of exctation
increase or decrease should be able to symmetrize the waves and should be
continually adjustable.
Results:
After the test, get the PJ1 out.
Make sure this done:
5. Phase-change characteristics check

Check compatibility between the set control angle in channel A and B and the
control signals. The ranges for UKX are 860~7600, the corresponding UK should be
10.6%~103.7%, linear.
UKX
860
UK
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7600
refernce
value
Set A UK
Set B UK
Attention: in the procedure of the test, use the commissioning compter to set the
channel as the constant angle mode, after input the set UKX, record the UK value on
the regulator screen. (When Channel A is working, record UKA; When Channel B is
working, record UKB,)
the standard for judgement: in the space interval of
UKX=4000~5000, the UK error should not exceed 3%.
6. Voltage display calibration in de-excitator

DC output Transformer LCD voltage LCD display LCD
voltage
output
display
B value
display Voltage gauge
V value
ranges
Attention: as to the intelligent power controller system, it is necessary to do the

coltage calibration on the screen of de-excitator. For measures of calibrtion, refer to
the indication on the screen. As to the conventional power controller system, theres
no need of calibration, but operaters need to check if the output of transformer is at
7-21

normal state.
7. Failure test for inversion failure

In the situation of reversed electricity supply, please set the rectifier/reversion
switch at the post of reversion or the remote reversion command. If 10 seconds after
receiving the command, the PT voltage is still higher than 10% of the set value, the
de-excitater switch is turned on by the relay protector caused by reversion failure and
check the correctness of corresponding alarm signals.
Results:
8. Test for impulse circuit

Power controller withdraw switch on for the cubicle withdrawal, and off for its
onstate. Observe the LCD, impulse indicator lights on power controller pulse board
and the output waveforms in the rectifier bridge, to make sure the function of the
switch is at normal state.
Results:
Attention: when theres only one power controller, theres no switch for pulse cut.
9. Divided de-excitation switch cut impulse check

Divide de-excitation switch, to ensure no impulse output. Results:
10. BOD switch off function check after over-voltage protection

Similate over-voltage protection by means of condenser discharged. Observe the
DC voltage output, and check the correctness of corresponding alarm signals.
Results:
Attention: the standard for the condensers can be 50V/1000uf, directly charged from
the 24v power circuit in the excitation system. The charging time is generally less
than 5 seconds. In the process of discharging, directly put the condenser on the
mutual-inducer in the de-excitation resistor. As to the linear resistor de-excitation
circuit, this step can be skipped.
11. In-phase voltage circuit check

Through testing the DC current in the in-phase primary, secondary voltage and the
7-22

diode rectifier voltage or QF01, operators can judge the correctness of this circuit wire.
The in-phase voltage transformer 3-phase voltage is basically the same. The input DC
voltage for the QF01 operational switch should be 1.4 fold larger than the in-phase
change secondary volt 220v voltage. (If there are 2 steps changing at the same time,
fill in the following table.)
Sandard value
Actual value
In-phase changing primary volt

In-phase changing secondary volt
Rectifer volt
12. Fan power voltage transformer circuit check

Measure the primary and secondary volt voltage of the fan power, and fill in the
results.
Standard value
Actual value
Fan power primary volt

Fan power secondary volt
Changing ratio
Check the 90%Ug fan power.
Results:
Attention: (1)when the test could not provide the rated power of the fan power
voltge transformer primary volt, operaters can add AC 380v power plant power supply
to the transformer primary volt to get the voltage on the secondary volt, and judge if
the transformer is at normal state. (2) when the voltage at the generater terminal is less
than 90% of the rated vale, the power transformer circuit is out of work, or the low
voltage in the fan may damage the fan. (3) when there is no fan power voltage
transformer , this step can be skipped.
13. Record for excitation system output signals

Order No.
Items for test
Contact
signal Screen signal
without power
1
Pulse error
7-23

2
In-phase phase cut
Reversion failure
Over-voltage protection
VIII.
Unloaded close loop testing
parrelel connected. Introduce wire from the excitation change secondary side in the
testing machine unit to the anode side of the excitater rectifier bridge, switch off the
circuit breakers at the testing machine unit and the rotor circuit, switch on the
interconnected circuit breaker, connect the excitation voltage transformer and the
generator terminal. Switch on the rotor circuit breaker in the testing machine unit, and
connect the rotor with the de-excitator wsitch output terminal. Turn on the generator
to make it spin at rated speed.
1. Raise voltage from 0

Choose the mode of increase voltage in channel A or channel B. initiation should
be able to establish 10% terminal voltage.
Results:
After this voltage increase in order, continue the operation of excitation increase
until the terminal voltage reaches 100%. In this process, operators can see the steady
increase of voltage through the commissioning software, without vibration.
Results:
Check residual voltage excitation function.
Results:
Attention: if the lab cannot meet the requiry of voltage increase from 0 or
residual voltage initiation tests, the above test could be done on site test.
2. Initiation at preset value

Initiate respectively in the normal state in channels A, B and C. Each of them can
establish terminal voltage at the preset value.
Channel A
PT voltage:
7-24

Channel B
PT voltage:
Channel C
PT voltage:
Attention: the preset value of channel C is the loe limit of the excitation current in
channel C, generally speaking, after voltage increase, the terminal voltage is
10%~20% of the rated value.
3. Regulating ranges
Channel
Regulating range
Standard value
Terminal voltage high limit:
High limit: 110% rated voltage
Low limit:
B

Low limit:
Excitation voltage or current
Results
Low limit: 70% rated value

High limit: 110% rated excitaion
High limit:
voltage
Low limit:
Low limit: 10%~20% 0-loaded

excitation voltage
4. Regulation of channel tracking accuracy and switch

4.1) Accuracy regulation when channel C tracks channel B
Regulate W3 potential device on the analogue quantity board to prevent
interruption when channel B is switched tochannel C.
Make sure done:
4.2) Accuracy regulation when channel B tracks channel C
After channel C tracks channel B, channel B is at work, after the channel C tracking
is finished (LDD, LID flashes alternately), modify parameter ID [6](ie.
Kc=Kc*UKB/UKC), so as to prevent interruption in the generator termianl when
channel C is switched to Channel B. otherwise remodify the ID [6] in channel B.
Set B Kc:
4.3) Accuracy regulation when channel A tracks channel C

7-25

After channel C tracks channel B, channel A is at work, after the channel C tracking
is finished (LDD, LID flashes alternately), modify parameter ID [6](ie.
Kc=Kc*UKA/UKC), so as to prevent interruption in the generator termianl when
channel C is switched to Channel A. otherwise remodify the ID [6] in channel A
Set A Kc:
4.4) Accuracy regulation of A/B channel tracking

Regulate parameter ID [8](ie. Kab), to prevent interruption when the 2channels of
A and B is switched one another.
Set A Kab:
Set B Kab:
Original
Swiched
working
standby
to PT voltage in the Switched

working channel
channel
to
standby
channel
5. Test for reversion

Working at 3 different channels, check if the manual and automatic reversion is at
normal state.
A
Manual Automatic Stop
Normal Normal
Normal Normal Normal
Normal Normal Normal
Attention: manual reversion means to operate the reversion switch on site.

Automatic reversion means the command input from the remote terminal.
Shutdown reversion means the machine unit frequency is lower than the excitation
system reversion frequency.
7-26
Normal
6. Analogue remote operation

Check if the initiation, excitation increase, excitation reduce and reversion is at
normal state, if the indicator lights are at normal state.
Channel A
results:
Channel B
results:
Channel C
results:
7. V/f restraint characteristic

The V/f restraint value is set at 110% rated valuein the automatic channel.
When
the frequency is lower than 45Hz, the regulator qutomatically reverses. Check the
correctness of the alarm signals of V/f restraint.
Regulator channel
V/f restraint value
Reversion
frequency
(Hz)
8. Frequency test
Frequency
PT voltage
9. System voltage tracking

System voltage tracking is on. The terminal voltage should be able to automatically
track the system voltage.
Results:
10. Power disappearance test

With electricity supplied by the sigle way power, the regulator should be able to
work normally.
Switch AC off, switch DC on
Switch DC off, switch AC on
Results:
Results:
11. Automatic switch test

7-27

The regulator works at channel A , similate the following faults respectively, the
regulator should be able to switch to the standby channels without vibration on the
generator voltage.
A: 1PT phase loss
results:
Meathod: cut any of the 1PT 3-phase input voltage

B: Power error: microcomputer channel 5v power
results:
Meathod: turn off the power switch QF03 of regulator in channel A.

C: regulator error
results:
Method: restore the CPU of regulator in channel A.

When the regulator is working at B channel, similate the above error, the regulator
should be able to switch to channel C, without vibration in the generator voltage.
Results:
12.Over-excitation
limit test
Modify the over-excitation restraint value in the A/B regulator, similate the
over-excitation restraint, check the stability after the restraint action, and check the
correctness of the force-excitaion , over-excitation restraint alarm signals.
Attention: when the sampling excitation current inside the regulator is larger than
the preset over-excitation restraint time, the force-excitation alarm signal would be
sent out. When the over-excitation anti-timage is due, the over-excitation signal
would be sent out.
12. Regulation of channel C 110%over-voltage limit

Channel A or B is working. Short connect the CT signal circuit to make the feeback
signal as 0. at this moment, the control signal in channel C is the lowest. Regulate W2
potential device in channel C to make the control signals in channel C compatible
with that in the working channels. Switch to C channel. The terminal voltage remains
the same, and then regulate W2 potential device at channel C to set the terminal
voltage as 110% reted value.
Results:
7-28
13. Revertion command test when On-line breaker lock

Analogue on-line breaker on, reversion command is ineffective.
Results:
Analogue on-line breaker on, intelligent de-excitater switch is ineffective.

Results:
14. Step test

Order
Phase
Termina
Step up Vibration
No.
step
l voltage regulati
times
quantit
before
on
step up
step
quantity
Regulator
Step down Vibratio
for y time for regulation

step up
quantity
n times ory time

for step for step
down
Attention: this test is done through the commissioning software.
If the results
are not satisfactory, operators can modify the TA3,TA4 parameter of the AVR.
Because of the great rotor time constant difference between the testing machine units
and the actual machine units, this test is just for reference, which means that the actual
phase step test should be done on site.
15. Record for excitation system output signal

Order
Items
Contact
No.
signal Screen signal
without power
1PT error
2PT error
Set A testing system error
Set B testing system error
Set A power error
Set B power error
7-29
Regulat
down

7
Set B regulator error
Set C regulator error
10
V/f restraint
11
Over-excitation restraint
12
Force-excitation
IX. ON-Load close loop testing

Increase the voltage from 0 volt to the rated value, operators should pay attention to
the indication on the corresponding table on the gauge screen of the testing machines.
When interconnecting the machines, regulate the terminal voltage as well as the
generator spinning speed, to make the spinning speed of the corresponding table as
slow as possible. When the indicated needle nears to the angle of 0 degree, switch on
the interconnection button. This done, the machines are interconnected, when the
shock to the generator is the lowest. After interconnection, check the regulator screen
to make sure the indicator light of interconnection is on.
1. Negative charge in interconnection

Chanenl A
results:
Channel B
results:
Channel C
results:
Attention: operators can increase or reduce active power through regulation of the
generator spinning speed, while the increase or reduce of reactive power can be
achieved through regulation of excitation current output.
2. Polarity check in deviation regulation

Set the polarity as positive deviation regulation.
Channel A
results:
Channel B
results:
Attention: the polarity and grade of this regulation can be set through the
operational bottons on the screen of the regulator. When the deviation regulation is set
7-30

as positive, the increase of grade results in the decrease of reactive power of the
machine unit.
3. Test for under-excitation restraint

When the genrator active pwer is getting close to 0, the de-excitation makes the
generators reactive power negative. Till the function of under-excitation restraint is
stimulated, the reactive power of the generator would not increase any more. Check
the correctness of alarm indicator and the output of signal contact.
Keep the generator in the state of reactive power, gradually increase the active
power of the generator, and check the generator reactve power value, which should be
reduced accordingly.
In the process of under-excitation, the system is in a steady state. Increase
excitation, and the regulator will exit the under-excitation restraint.
Channel A
results:
Channel B
results:
Attention: in this test, operators can temporarily reduce the setting value of
under-excitation.
4. Constant reactive power regulation test

Increase excitation so as to make the generator reactive power positive, set the
regulator as constant Q regulation through the regulatory software or the
operational bottons on the screen, and the excitation system would regulate based on
the the current reactive value and increase or reduce the active power. In this process,
the reactive power remains the same. Operators check the correctness of the status
display and the signal contact output.
Exit the constan Q regulation, connect the commissioning software and the serial
interface of the regulator, input the command constant reactive power regulation
and set the reactive value to the excitation system through BitBoy software and
RS485/RS232, the regulator would regulate according to the set value of the
command.
Check the correctess of the status display and the output of signal
contact.
7-31

Channel A
results:
Channel B
results:
5. Constant power coefficient regulation test

Increase excitation so as to make the generator reactive power positive, set the
regulator as constant PF regulation through the regulatory software or the
operational bottons on the screen, and the excitation system would regulate based on
the the current power coefficient and increase or reduce the active power. In this
process, the reactive power remains the same. Operators check the correctness of the
status display and the signal contact output.
Exit the constan PF regulation, connect the commissioning software and the serial
interface of the regulator, input the command constant PF regulation and set the
reactive value to the excitation system through BitBoy software and RS485/RS232,
the regulator would regulate according to the set value of the command.
Check the
correctess of the status display and the output of signal contact.

Channel A
results:
Channel B
results:
Attention: (1) when channel C is in operation, both constant PF and constant Q

regulation are ineffective. (2) When the reactive power is lower than 0, the constant
PF regulation is invalid (3) when the constant Q and constant PF regulation are
invalid, the status display and the output of signal contact should exit, too.
6. Record for excitation system output signals

Order
Items
Contact
No.
without power
Under-excitation restraint
Constant Q reglation (handy

control)
Constant PF regulation (handy

control)
signal Screen
Constant
reglation
7-32
signal

(communication control)
5
Constant
PF
regulation
(communication control)
X. Grand electric current testing

parrelel connected. Switch off the wire from the excitation change secondary volt in
the testing machine unit to the excitaion cubicle. Introduce wire from the grand
currentn voltage transformer to the rectifier bidge input terminal. Switch off the
circuit breakers at the testing machine unit and the rotor circuit, connect the the rotor
in the testing machine unit to the grand current testing load and switch off the
interconnection circuit breaker. As to the intelligent power controller system, the
secondary cable of testing voltage transformer should go hrough CT, and the output
terminal of CT should be introduced to the CT wiring terminal at the excitation
cubicle.
Set channel A and B in the manual operation mode, set the parameter TB1, TB2 of
constant IL regulation as 0.1, 4 for the time being.
Input the AC input current of rectifier, measure and check the phase order as a
positive one. Switch on the interconnection circuit breaker to make the PT signal
electrical. The regulator is in the state of operation. The output value of excitation
current should be the excitation current low limit of regulator A/B, accounting for
5~10% of the rated current.
Operate the excitation increase botton and the excitation current increases
accordingly.
1. Excitation current calibration

Based on the current divider output, calibrate the regulator, power controller and
the de-excitater current display.
Attention: calibrate the regulator current display when the cannel is not in opertion.
Record for regulator excitation current calibration
7-33

Output
Output
Set
A Set
B Set A excitation Set B excitation
current (%)
current
current
current
(A)
display
display
current coefficient
current
coefficient
Record for power controller excitation current output calibration

Output current (%)
Output
1#cubicle current 2#cubicle current
current (A)
display (A)
display (A)
50%
75%
100%
LCD
display
positive
bridge arm K value

LCD
display
negative
bridge arm K value

LCD display B value
Record for power de-exciter current output calibration

Output
Output
Transducer LCD
LCD
LCD
Ammeter
current
current
output
current
display
display
quantity
(%)
(A)
(mA)
display
B value
K value
(A)
(A)
7-34
Attention: for the convetional system theres no need to calibrate the power
controller and the de-excitater parameter except the output value of exciation current
transducer.
2. Test for rectifier on/off

In the rated output current, operators use the switch for this test.
Results:
Attention: when theresjust 1 power controller, theres no power controller pulse cut
switch.
3. Regulation of automatic current balancing

3.1) Regulation of bisectrix signal
Based on the priciple that under the circumstance of rated excitation current, the
current bisectrix is 10m A, input all power controllers, IL=1.0, regulate the W1
potential device on the switch quantity board to make the voltage at the EL-Q point:
2.5v/cubicle quantity.
Make sure this test done:
3.2) Regulation of current balancing

When all the automatic current balancing is off, find out the power controller with
the biggest current output and then put all the automatic current balancing on again.
Regulate the deviation quantity on the power controller picked out, until the balancing
effect is satisfactory. Record the results in the following table.
Test data when all the automatic current balancing is on
Total
Divider
Current
1#cubicle 2#cubicle De-excitater Current
current
output
display of the current
current
current
balacing
output (A)
(Mv)
regulator (A)
display
display
display (A)
coefficient
(A)
(A)
7-35
(%)
Parameter record for balancing calibration
Positive
bridge
1#power
2#power
3#power
4#power
controller
controller
cntroller
controller
arm
calibration value
Negative
bridge
arm
calibration value
Attention: conventional power controller neednt being tested as above-mentioned.
Test data when automatic current balancing is all off:
Total
Divider
Current
1#cubicle
current
output
display
output (A)
(mv)
the regulator display (A)
of current
2#cubicle
De-excitater Current
current
current
display (A) display (A)
(A)
balacing
coefficient
(%)
4. Wind channel temperature calibration in the rectifier

Make sure this test finished:
5.
Calibration of de-exciter rotor temperature
KT=
Attention: conventional power controller neednt being tested as above-mentioned.
6. Fan shutdown test (no less than 30 minutes)

6.1) Silicon component type standard:
6.2) Temperature measurement
Room-emperature:
, 1#cubicle power controller output current :
the silicon component surface temperature in the condition of

Time
10
1#components
7-36
15
20
Measure
shutdown fan A.
25
30

temperature ()
3#components
temperature ()
5#components
temperature ()
4#components
temperature ()
6#components
temperature ()
2#components
temperature ()
Room-emperature:
, 2#cubicle power controller output current :
Measure
the silicon component surface temperature in the condition of shutdown fan A.

Time
10
15
20
25
30
1#components
temperature ()
3#components
temperature ()
5#components
temperature ()
4#components
temperature ()
6#components
temperature ()
2#components
temperature ()
Attention: only those power controller systems with more than 1000A need this test.
7-37

At the same period, a single silicon component would not exceed 5, or there amy be
something wrong with the silicon component or the units. In this circunstance,
operators should lay emphasis on this test and prolong the testing time.
XI. Factory set parameter

Insulation and dielectric strength testing
XII.
Insulation and dielectric test
1. Insulation test
Main excitation circuit to the ground
M
Results:
DC operation circuit to the groud
M
Results:
AC power circuit to the groud
M
Results:
2. Frequency dielectric strength test

Main excitation circuit frequency dielectric strength to the ground
Results:
DC operational circuit frequency dielectric strength to the ground
Results:
AC operational circuit frequency dielectric strength to the ground
Results:
7-38
Appendix 2
Site commissioning schemes for the EXC9000

excitation system
I. The necessay conditions for commissioning

1. The following preparation should be done by the users before
the site commissioning
z
Make sure that all the cubicles are properly installed according to the
diagram the arrangement diagram of excitation cubicles in the excitation
system. Pay attention to the correctness of the arranging direction and order
of the cubicles.
Lay all the cables and wires and check the lines according to the diagram,
including checking the voltage mutual-inducer, current mutual-inducer and
protection circuit and prevent no short circuit in voltage mutual-inducer and
no open circuit in current mutual-inducer.
Make sure that the AC; DC system has the power for power supply for the
excitation system.
If operators are doing some tests on generator and other main tests, such as
the generator short circuit test, they should prepare the temporary power
supply for voltage transformer and the switch.
Other equipments such as protection eqipment, electric substation, water

turbine, speed regulator, gas turbine, gas machine regulator, generator and
auxiliary eqipment should be prepared well several days ahead.
Get ready for the preservation and protection measures.
Attention: the control contact for other control unit to the excitaion machine set
should be empty contact without power, or the power would burn the internal
components.
2. The following preparation should be done by the engeneers of

excitation set up before the site commissioning.
7-39

z
Make sure that all the cubicles are properly installed according to the diagram
the arrangement diagram of excitation cubicles in the excitation system. Pay
attention to the correctness of the arranging direction and order of the cubicles.
Check the laid cables and wires according to the diagram, including checking the
voltage mutual-inducer, current mutual-inducer and protection circuit and prevent
no short circuit in voltage mutual-inducer and no open circuit in current
mutual-inducer.
Double check the parent wires cross the cubicles, cables and BUS in the
excitation system to make sure its correctness.
Especially check the wiring of de-excitater switch and the over-excitation

protection circuit
Double check correctness of voltage and polarity input into the AC/DC power
from outside.
Check the correctness of in-phase voltage transfomer and its primary grade
II. Operation and signal circuit testing

1. Check the power supply circuit
Switch off the switch connecting the outside power and the excitation cubicle and
the fast fuse. Input the outsidepower and check if the input power voltage and polarity
is at normal state at the power input terminal.
Uab
Ubc
Uac
Factory power section I

Factory power section II
DC power section I
DC power section II
Power for swith on
Power for excitation
Check the power circuit inside the excitation cubicle with a universal meter,
including the AC power circuit, DC power circuit, DC24v power circuit, DC 12v
power circuit, and DC5v power circuit, to make sure theres no problem of short
7-40

circuit. Then switch on the switch, making the power supply available. Check if the
following power is at normal state at the power output terminal.
Items
DC
24v DC power
power
DC
Regulator power supply
electricity Channel A
Channel B
operation supply
2. Flashing
Handy manual
results:
Automatic initiation
results:
Attention: to prevent electricity moving to the rotor circuit, the swich of excitation
should be turned off.
Operators can check the normality of the initiation circuit
through the action of excitation contactor. Keep the initiation once it is on, unless the
initiation time is up or the operator manually stops the initiation.
If the residual voltage initiation is not on, the results: 10 seconds after initiation
witout successfully establishing the voltage, the initiation would automatically stop
and sends out signals initiation failure.
If the residual voltage initiation is on, the results: 10 seconds after initiation witout
successfully establishing the voltage, the auxiliary power supply would be
automatically put into use. 5 seconds later, the initiation stops automatically and sends
out signals initiation failure.
Results:
Flashing polarity
Results:
Attention: in checking theinitiation polarity, there should be an excitation power

supply, which should be switched on. To prevent electricity moving to the rotor circuit,
the swich of excitation should be turned off. Then switch on the main contactor of
Q61 to measure the voltage between the positive and negative wire on the
dde-excitater switch and its polarity.
3. Fan operation
7-41

Manually switch on and off the fans.
Normal operation:
Attention: intelligent power controller system operats the fan switch on the display
screen, while the conventional power controller system has a manual switch inside it.
Automatically switch on and off the fans.
Normal operation:
Attention: if the startup command R651 is effective, the fans would be turned
automatically.
Automatic switch of fan
Normal operation:
Results:
Results:
Power plant switch
Results:
Fan operational status signal indicator
Normal display:
Attention: when the power conroller applies the A /B two fans, the direction and
status indicator of both fans should be checked.
4. De-excitater switch operation

Handy manual switch on and off the brake
Normal operation:
Remote operational switch on and off the brake Normal operation:

Accident and invertion failure brake
Normal operation:
Line II brake circuit
Normal operation:
De-excitator switch status signal indicator
Normal display:
Correctness of de-excitater switch auxiliary contact output results:

5.
Check of illumination and heater
results:
6. Check the input signal from outside of the excitation system

Order
External input signals
Display on the DI lights on the I/O

screen
board
Increase-excitation
---
DI.1
Reduce-excitation
---
DI.2
PSS locked
When
PSS
is
at
work,DI.5 light is on,
7-42

and then the lock signal
is input and the light
DI.5 is off.
4
Brake of Circuit breaker
DI.6
at the exit of the genertor

5
Startup command
DI.9
Stop command
DI.10
Attention: input the external signals through the short connected wire. Then test
through the direct input of signals from the remote control.
7. Check the input signal of the excitation system

Similate the following output signals, observe the relay on the IO board and see if
the indicator light is on. At the same time check if the corresponding contact of relay
is connected, and if the indication for remote monitoring system is correct.
Order Items
Indicater lights Relay
Remote
No.
on
display
the
board
1
Channel A working
Channel B working
Channel C working
Channel B standby
Channel C standby
Constant
IL
regulation
7
Automatic mode
PSS input
Over-excitation
protection
10
DC power section I
off
7-43
IO contactor
action

11
DC power section II
off
12
AC power off
13
De-excitater
switch
on
14
De-exctater
switch
off
15
De-excitater
switch
off mistakenly
16
1#power
contrller
error or exit
17
2#power
contrller
error or exit
18
Set A power error
19
Set B power error
20
24v power error
21
Communication error
22
Initiation failure
23
Over-excitaton
---
---
protection exit
Attention: (1) according to the semand of users, the signals at contact point without
power may not be totally identiacal to the above signals. The acutual value should be
checked according to the special diagram. (2) Other signals, such as PT error, the
regulator error can be tested in the open loop testing.
8. Excitaion communication check

Connect the RS485 with the monitoring system, so the monitoring system would
send controlling command to the excitation system based on the bilateral agreement
assigned by both sides. At the same time, the monitoring system would also
parallelize signal wires at the excitation system serial communication interface,
7-44

converted by the RS485/RS232 then connected to the commissioning computer.
Operators use the BitBoy software to monitor if the output signal and the reaction
signal in the excitation system are at normal state.
Make sure checked:
Attention: the outward serial interface in EXC9000 system is RS485.
In the
process of commissioning, it is necessary to setup the convertion mode RS485/RS432

for testing.
III. Open-loop testing

Wiring way:
(1) Unfold the wire inside the cubicle introduced through 1PT, 2PT; unfold the DC
cable from the output polar of the de-excitater switch to the fenerator rotor; unfold the
cables from the excitation change secondary volt to the power controller rectifier
bridge.
Attention: if there are too many DC cables from the output polar of the
de-excitater switch to the fenerator rotor to unfold all of them, operators can cut the
de-excitater switch and cut the rotor load. But remember to remove the signals of cut
pulse with devided brakers and reversion with devided brakers, or the regulator
would not be able to work normally.
If there are too many cables from the excitation change secondary volt to the power
controller rectifier bridge to unfold all of them, operators can devide the anode switch
of the rectifier bridge, cut the input power from the excitation voltage transformer and
at the same time, cut off the fuse on the primary volt of the in-phase voltage
transformer so as to connect the in-phase power supply.
(2) The 3-phase power supply is introduced to the primary volt of the 3-phase voltage
regulator through the air switch and operators should make sure that the input power
is positive-phase. The secondary volt of this regulator replace 2PT,1PT, the input
terminal of PT signal as well as the anode switch of the rectifier bridge. The capacity
of the 3-phase voltage transformer should be no less than 3KVA.
(3) The rotors off, operators use eletric furnace or resistor with a certain capacity to
7-45

take place of the rotors. Connect them to the output side of the rectifier as the
commissioning load.
The capacity should be about 30, with a capacity of more
than 1KW.
(4 )The point of the ondoscope should be connected to the rectifier bridge for the sake
of observing the output excitation voltage waveforms.
1. Record the actual corresponding value of the 10% voltage

ActionvalueUpt=
Feedback value Upt=
2. Setup for the set value

Channel A preset
Channel Bpreset
Channel C preset
Attention: when the 0 voltage initiation is operable, the preset value of Channel
A and B IS 10%, while it is not operable, the preset value is 97%. When the preset is
at normal state in channel C, the preset value is the low limit of its current regulation.
3. Check the automatic channel characteristics

Without changing the preset value, the control signal in channel A and B should rise
as the PT voltage rises, and should decrease as the PT voltage decreases. The
feedback signals in Channel C are the excitation current, which remains unchanged
even the PT changes.
Without changing PT voltage, in excitation increase, control signals decrease, and
angle shrinkd; in excitation decrease, control signals increase and angle swell.
Without changing PT voltage, similate remote increase or reduce excitaion by
means of short circuit, the controlling signals should be working normally.
Without changing PT voltge, actually increase or reduce the excitation through
remote monitoring system, the controlling system should be at normal state of work.
Results:
Attention: because theres the function to prevent excitation increase or decrease
points from sticking to each other, in operation of excitation increase or decrease, the
time for conneting should not exeed 4 seconds, or the command is ineffective.
7-46
4. Check for the rectifier output waveforms

Located in channel A and B, used to check the waveforms from each rectifier
bridge, with continual alteration and without mutation.
Results:
Attention: when there are more than 2 rectifier bridges in the system, separate
check for each rectifier bridge is necessary. At the same time, cut the AC current input
or triggering pulse in the rest of the rectifiers.
5. Test for channel C

Short connected the JP1 on analogue quantity board by jumper code, switch to
channel C, and observe the waveforms from the rectifier. The operation of exctation
increase or decrease should be able to symmetrize the waves and should be
continually adjustable.
Results:
After the test, get the PJ1 out.
normal
Make sure this done: confirm
6. Reversion failure test

Input rated PT voltagein the regulator, please set the rectifier/reversion switch at
the post of reversion or the remote reversion command. If 10 seconds after
receiving the command, the PT voltage is still higher than 10% of the set value, the
de-excitater switch is turned on by the relay protector caused by reversion failure and
check the correctness of corresponding alarm signals.
Results:
7. Test for forbidden reversion after interconnection

Input rated PT voltagein the regulator, similate the interconnection signal input with
short connected wires, set the rectifier/reversion switch at the post of reversion or
the remote reversion command. If 10 seconds after receiving the command, the PT
voltage is still higher than 10% of the set value, the inversion failure will not occur
and the failure protection relay would not start up the de-excitater switch.
Results:
7-47
8. Test for over-voltage restraint

After input rated PT voltagein the regulator, continue increase the PT voltage till it
reaches to about 110% of the rated value. The V/F restraint signal would take action;
observe if the signals are at normal state.
Results:
9. Test for pulse cut circuit

Power controller withdraw switch on for the cubicle withdrawal, and off for its
onstate. Observe the LCD, impulse indicator lights on power controller pulse board
and the output waveforms in the rectifier bridge, to make sure the function of the
switch is at normal state.
Results:
Attention: when theres only one power controller, theres no switch for pulse cut.
10. Check for de-exictation switch cut pulse

Similate the signal cut pulse with devided braker and send it to the regulator,
make sure that there is no pulse output.
Results:
11. Test for automatic switch

Regulator works at channel A, analogue the following errors, the regulator should
be able to switch to channel B or C. Observe the normality of status of display signals
and the signals sent out to the monitoring system.
A: 1PT phase loss:
Results:
Test meathod: cut off any of the 3-phase input voltage.

B: power error (the 5v power in the microcomputer channel
Results:
Test meathod: cut off the power switch QF03 in regulator A

C: Regulator error
Results:
Test meathod: restore the restoring botton on the CPU board in regulator A.
When the regulator is working in channel B, analogue the above errors respectively,
the regultor should be able to automatically switch to channel C without too much
7-48

vibration in the generator voltage.
Results:
12. Check normal state of the 90%Ug fan power supply

Results:
13. Check of the excitation output signals

Analogue the following signals, observe the indicator lights on the IO board for
relay output to see if they are on and at the same time, check if the relay contactor is
connected and whether the remote monitoring indication is correct.
Order
Items
No.
Display of the Relay
Remote
indicator
display
contactor
lights on the action

IO board
1
1PT error
2PT error
Set A test system error
Set B test system error
Set A power error
Set B power error
Set B regulator error
Set C regulator error
10
V/f restraint
11
De-excitation failure
IV. Generator short circuit testing

The test of short circuit dry and circuit characteristic on the generaror sets are
actually not inclusive in the tests of the excitation system and the rectifier generally
carries it out through the power supplied by power of changeable voltage. As the
capacity of the generator sets is becoming bigger and bigger these years, the
7-49

changeable rectifier power can no longer meet the requirement of the test, which
means that the excitaion system is needed for the short circuit test.
Since the
generator terminal has already been short circuit, the excitation power needs other
source of power supply. There are 2 modes:
(1) After the electricity is reversed, the excitation voltage transformer supplies
the power
(2) Connect the power through the electricity from the factories: get electricity
from 6kV or 10Kv wire to the excitation voltage transformer, or use the
factory testing voltage tranformer in place of the excitation voltage
transformer.
Stop
serious alarm:operators should close the functions of residual voltage
exctation, system voltage tracking and channel tracking, and switch off the
excitation switch. At the same time, the operation of initiation botton and
switchingchannel is forbidden, which is to prevent abnormality.
Before the test, operators should first of all, check the correctness of the order
phase of the power. Make sure it is of positive phase.
Generall speaking, in the above 2 modes, to carry out the short circuit test, there are
the following wiring ways:
1. Short circuit test when the point is inside the PT terminal

In this mode, the point is at the PT terminal, the terminal volt is unfold outside the
shortcircuit point, the interconnection switch of generator is on, and after the
electricity reversion, the excitation change as well as the PT terminal is charged at the
same time.
phase of the power and the normality of the regulator. Ways to check as the
following:
1) Detach the interconnection command in the external terminal line;
Attention: because in this way the electricity upply is resersally provided, which is
not the real generators interconnection, this signal should be removed.
7-50

2) De-excitator braker devided, operators should remove the devide pulse cut signal
in the regulator
3) Connect an electric furnace or a resistoric load at the input terminal of the
excitation switch. Connect the touching point of the ondoscope. operators get ready to
observe the voltage waveforms from the rectifier.
Attention: first connect the resistor for test, which is to test if the control of
regulator and rectifier is at normal state.
4) The machine units are in the state of shutdown, the regulator powered off, switch
on the interconnection switch at the side of generator outlet, which would provide
electricity for the excitation voltage transformer and PT, check the phase order of the
rectifier bridge input power to ensure the positive phase.
5) Switch off the interconnection switch, resend electricity to the regulator, and set the
regulators in A/B channel into the mode of constant excitation regulation. Short
connect the JP1 of the regulator in channel C on the analogue quantity board, set the C
channel in the mode of constant control angle regulation
6) Regulators switched to channel C
Attention: this is the first time the excitaton system is tested with the generator unit,
so it is impossible to judge if the current feedback is normal. Channel C doesnt need
the current feedback signals in the constant angle control regulation mode, which
is safer and more reliable. .
7) Switch on the interconnection switch at the exit of the generator, providing
electricity for the excotation voltage transformer and PT. Regulator set C will begin to
work normally, and send out pulse signals.At this moment, the set signal of channel C
is at its loe limit, the output of excitation voltage is 0.
8) Operate the excitaion increase botton on the regulator to add the set value of
channel C, the control signals in channel C would
s decrease accordingly, while the
output voltage of the rectifier would increase. At this moment observe the voltage
waveform to see if it is steady and if theres mutation.
9) Operate the excitaion decrease botton on the regulator to reduce the set value of
7-51

channel C, the control signals in channel C would increase accordingly, while the
output voltage of the rectifier would decrease. At this moment observe the voltage
waveform to see if it is teady and if theres mutation.
10) When the output voltage reaches it maximum value, wind the botton
rectifier/reversion to the position of reversion. The output voltage should drop to
0, and make sure if it is normal.
11) After the above tests, operators can judge the performace of the regulator and
rectifier. Switch off the interconnection switch, and turn on the de-excitater, so that
the devided braker pulse cut returns to normal state.
The steps for short circuit test:

1) Set the machine unit at a certain spinning speed, make sure that the command of
interconnection signal is removed, and the functions of residual initiation,
ssystematic voltage tracking and channel tracking are off, switch off the initiation
power switch, and make sure that the JP1 jumper in the regulator of analogue quantity
BUS channel C.
2) Power the regulator and swith it to channel C.
Attention: operators can also adopt the constant control angle mode in channel
A/B, but this should be set through the commissioning software. After that, the
indicator lights for this mode would be on. Input the maximum signal through the
commissioning software.
Attention: restart the regulator in channel A/B, thus exiting the constant control
angle mode.
In the process of the test remember to make sure the regulator in
channel A/B is in the constant control angle mode.

3) Turn on the interconnection switch to supply electricity reversally,
operate the excitation increase botton, the voltage in the rectifier will inrease
accordingly, the rotor current would increase, as well as the stator short circuit in the
generator current.
Observe the normality of rotor current in the regulator, and then
cooperate with the testing department of the generators to finish the short circuit dry
test or the short circuit characteristic test.
7-52

4) After the test, set channel A/B in the automatic mode once again. Detah the JP1
in channel C, and get ready to carry out the other-excitation idle-loaded pressure
build-up test.
Attention: dont switch the channels in this test, when adopting the constant
control angle mode, operaters had better to set all the 3 channels into this mode.
2. Short circuit test when the point is outside the PT terminal

In this mode, the point is outside the PT terminal, the terminal volt is unfold outside
the shortcircuit point, the interconnection switch of generator is on, and after the
electricity reversion, the excitation change is charged, but the PT terminal is off
charge.
The procedure of the test is more or less the same as the first method mentioned
above. But as the PT is off charge, it is necessary to provide a 10% terminal voltage
signal for the regulator after the reversal supply of electricity, so as to make the
regulator work properly.
There are 2 ways in which to get the R631 signal:
1) Short circuit R631 and R602 in the X2 terminal on the AP3 board so that the
regulator can receive the signals for start up and begins to work. The 3 channels can
all be tested; other steps are the same as the first wiring way of test.
2) After connection of the regulators A/B with the commissioning software, make the
regulators A/B enter the mode of constant control angle. Send out the command of
forced start to make regulators A/B work.
After receiving this command the
regulator will start to work. Other steps are the same as the test for the first wiring
way.
Attention: the R631 signal obtained through the above mode is valid to all the 3
channels. Dont switch channels in the process of the test, and its best to set the 3
channels at the mode of constant control angle.
phase of the power and the normality of the regulator. Ways to check as the following:
1) Detach the interconnection command in the external terminal line;
7-53

De-excitator braker devided, operators should remove the devide pulse cut signal in
the regulator
excitation switch. Connect the touching point of the ondoscope.
3) Operators get ready to observe the voltage waveforms from the rectifier.
Attention: first connect the resistor for test, which is to test if the control of
regulator and rectifier is at normal state.
7) Switch on the interconnection switch at the exit of the generator, providing
electricity for the excotation voltage transformer
8) With the R631 signal, regulator set C will begin to work normally, and send out
pulse signals. At this moment, the set signal of channel C is at its loe limit, the output
of excitation voltage is 0.
channel C, the control signals in channel C would decrease accordingly, while the
7-54

BUS channel C.
angle mode.

3) Turn on the interconnection switch to supply electricity reversally,
4) With the R631 signal, the regulator begins to work properly, and sends out pulse
signal. Operate the excitation increase botton, the voltage in the rectifier will inrease
generator current. Observe the normality of rotor current in the regulator, and then
build-up test.
7-55

3. Power supplied by factory to the rectifier bridge

In this mode: operators can set the shortcircuit point at the export of generator,
without opening the terminal main circuit. The interconnection switch is off, with no
reversed electricity from the electric network the PT of terminal and excitation
changing uncharged.
While supplying electricity to the exictation voltage transformer through the 6k V
or 10 k V main circuit, it is necessary to unfold the cable from the voltage transformer
to the terminal then connect it to the main circuit.
When adopting this mode, it is necessary to detach the main circuit or cable from the
side with low voltage of the transformer to the rectifier bridge, and connect the AC
cable from the low-voltage side to the rectifier bridge.
The procedure of the test is more or less the same as the second method mentioned
above. But as the PT is off charge, it is necessary to provide a 10% terminal voltage
signal for the regulator after the reversal supply of electricity, so as to make the
regulator work properly.
phase of the power and the normality of the regulator. Ways to check as the following:
1) De-excitator braker devided, operators should remove the devide pulse cut signal
in the regulator
excitation switch. Connect the touching point of the ondoscope. Operators get ready
to observe the voltage waveforms from the rectifier.
Attention: first connect the resistor for test, which is to test if the control of regulator
and rectifier is at normal state.
7-56

6) Switch on the excitation power
7) With the R631 signal, regulator set C will begin to work normally, and send out
pulse signals. At this moment, the set signal of channel C is at its low limit, the output
of excitation voltage is 0.
channel C, the control signals in channel C would decrease accordingly, while the
BUS channel C.
7-57

angle mode.

3) Turn on the interconnection switch to supply electricity reversally
4) With the R631 signal, the regulator begins to work properly, and sends out pulse
signal. Operate the excitation increase botton, the voltage in the rectifier will inrease
generator current. Observe the normality of rotor current in the regulator, and then
build-up test.
Stop
exctation , system voltage tracking and channel tracking, and switch off the
angle mode.
V. Other-excitation idle-loaded pressure build-up test in the

generator
In the above mode of short circuit test, it is only necessary to remove the
7-58

short-circuit point at the general terminal, other wires not changed. At this moment the
no-loaded pressure build-up test can be carried out. In the mode of other-excitation
mode, the system can still adopt the constant control angle mode. Operators can
also set channel A/B in the normal state, and carry out this test in channel A/B. In the
constant control mode, when building up pressure from 0-load it is necessary to
provide the R631 signal. The low limit value of the terminal voltage is the residual
voltage in the machine unit, which can approximate to 0. In the automatic voltage
regulation, when building up the voltage from 0-load, the low limit of the machine
terminal equals to the low limit of the regulator, which is usually 10% of the machine
rated voltage.
For the first time the test is carried out, operators should set the excitaiton mode as
pressure built-up from 0-load to make sure that the termiaal voltage is the lowlimit
of the regulator, for the sake of safety.
Stop
exctation , system voltage tracking and channel tracking, and switch off the
In this test, operators should focus on the phase order of the 3-phase voltage in the
generators. Make sure the phase order positive. If permitted, check the voltage from
the excitation voltage transformer to the rectifier bridge. Otherwise, when the machine
set recovers to the normal way of pressure build up, the excitation regulator may be
out of control if theres anything wrong with the excitation changing voltage.
When the pressure is built up successfully, the electromachenic installation
companies or the generator testing team can carry out this test.
Attention: for many generators, this of test is carried out through the wiring way of
self-combined excitation, so it can be ommited.
VI. Idle-load close loop test

1. Check of the residual voltage and the voltage in the excitation
changing secondary circuit.
7-59
Residual voltage data:

1PT AB 1PT
1PT
2PT
2PT
2PT
Excitation
EXC.
EXC
phanse
BC
CA
AB
BC
CA
transformer
transformer
transformer
(V)
phase
phase
phase
phase
phase
AB
phase BC
phase BC
(V)
(V)
(V)
(V)
(V)
(V)
(V)
(V)
Make use of the residual volage, check and make sure that the phase order of the
voltage in the secondary circuit is positive.
Or check the voltage phase through the open-loop test by means of reversed
electricity transport.
Make sure the phase check correct:
2. Rase voltage from 0

Select the function of pressure built-up from 0 and turn it on, tune the terminal
voltage to the rated value after the pressure built. Record the 0-loaded data.
Order
PT
Excitation
Excitation
Control
1#power
2#power
No.
voltage
current
volatge
signal
controller
controller
current
signal
7-60
phase
Attention: operators can choose the exciation mode of switch on the pressure
flash from 0-load by the functional bottons on the regulator display. In the process of
pressur build up, if the residual voltage is too high, >5~10V, operators can adopt the
mode of residual voltage excitaion. If the residual voltage is too low, operators can
use the auxiliary powr for exitation.
3. In-phase transformer check

Around the 0-load value, check the voltage correctness of the secondary circuit in
of the in-phase voltage transformer. Check the correctness of the size and polarity of
the rectifier voltage at the input side of the QF01operational switch; the rectifier
voltage should be 1.4 fold of the secondary circuit at the grade of 220V. Check the
correctness of the DC24V power output and record the data when voltage is 24v.
Confirmation:
Stop: attention: operators should never use the conventional universal meter to
measure the in-phase voltage in the primary circuit, to prevent damage to the spike
voltage.
4. Circuit check for the power voltage transformer of fans

Check the corrctnes of the secondary voltage at the fan power voltage transformer.
Confirmation:
Attention: operators should never use the conventional universal meter to measure
the in-phase voltage in the primary circuit, to prevent damage to the spike voltage.
Connet the AC current from the fan power voltage transformer and check the
correctness of the fans direction. Check the illuminators and the heater.
Confirmation:
5. Calibration of the PT voltage and the excitation current

7-61

Around the 0-load pressure value, the percntage at the testing terminal should be
compatible with the acutual value, or modify the parameter ID [4]; it is also the same
with the current. The excitaion current should be agreeable to the mearsurement of the
relay, or modify the parameter ID [3]. After modification, record the coefficient of the
terminal voltage and the exciattion current.
Coefficient for Voltage set
Coefficient for excitation current set
Coefficient for Voltage set
Coefficient for exciation current set
6. In-phase voltage calibration

First of all set the in-phase voltage coefficient as 1, and at the same
time
modifies the parameter ID [8], so that the TSD1 shows the in-phase voltage value.
Record the PT voltage and the in-phase voltage, mdify the parameter based on the
PT/TSD value, till the in-phase voltage equals to the PT voltage.
Record the
in-phase voltage coefficient:

Coefficient for Voltage set A
Coefficient for Voltage set B
Make sure JP1 is off
confirmation:
7. Modification of the ranges

Add voltage to the channe A/B for the V/F action, and lowered it to less than 70%;
set the voltage in channel C as high as 110%, if permitted, switched to the
120%voltage for restriction and lower it to the minimum value
Record the data in the following table
Channel
Regulating range
Standard value
Low limit:
B

Low limit:

7-62
Results

C

Low limit:
High limit: 110% rated excitaion

voltage
Low limit: 10%~20% 0-loaded
excitation voltage
8. The accuracy regulation for set C tracking set B

Regulate W3 on the analogue quantity board, to make no vibrtion when channel B
is switched to Chanel C. If the voltage drops, regulate the device anti-clockwise,
otherwise clockwise. Repeat it till there is no vibration.
Keep a record in the
following table.
Operational
Switch
to Operational
Switch
to
channel B
standby channel channel A
standby channel
PT voltage (V)
9. The accuracy regulation for set B tracking set C

Operation in set B, finish set C tracking (LDD, LDI LIGHTS FLASH
ALTERNATIVELY), record the controlling signals Ukb in Set B and the controlling
signals Ukc. Modify the parameter set B to make the ID[6]=ID[6]*Ukb/Ukc,when set
C is switched to set B , there should be no vibration, otherwise remodify ID[6].
Record the data,
Original operational channel: C
Switched to channel B
PT voltage (V)
10. The accuracy regulation for set A tracking set C

Operation in set A, finish set C tracking (LDD, LDI LIGHTS FLASH
ALTERNATIVELY), record the controlling signals Ukb in SetA and the controlling
signals Ukc. Modify the parameter set A to make the ID[6]=ID[6]*Uka/Ukc,when set
C is switched to set A , there should be no vibration, otherwise remodify ID[6].
Record the data,
Original operational channel: C
7-63
Switched to channel A

PT voltage (V)
11. The accuracy regulation for set B tracking set A

Set the set B parameter ID [8] as 0, after finishing tracking, switch A to B. if the
voltage rises, the ranges of set B parameter ID [8] is between 1.000~1.100. If the
voltage drops, the ranges of set B parameter ID [8] is between 0.900~1.000.after
regulation, when set A is switched to set B, there should be no vibration, other wise
remodify ID [8]. Record the data:
Original operational channel: A
Switched to channel B
PT voltage
12. The accuracy regulation for set A tracking set B

Set the set A parameter ID [8] as 0, after finishing tracking, switch B to A. if the
voltage rises, the ranges of set A parameter ID [8] is between 1.000~1.100. If the
voltage drops, the ranges of set A parameter ID [8] is between 0.900~1.000.after
regulation, when set B is switched to set A, there should be no vibration, other wise
remodify ID [8]. Record the data:
Original operational channel: B
Switched to channel A
PT voltage (V)
13. Presetting value initiation

Flash once in each of the channel A, B, C, respectively, in the normal position.
All of them can establish terminal voltage according to the preset value.
Adopt the
soft flash technique there should be no obvious overshoot.

Channel A
PT voltage:
Channel B
PT voltage:
Channel C
PT voltage:
14. Reversion test

Check if the manual reversion and automatic reversion is at normal state in the 3
channels respectively
Channel A
Channel B
Channel C
7-64

Manul
Automatic
Stop
Manul
Automatic
Stop
Manul Automatic Stop
15. Analogue remote operation

Check if the functions of initiation, ecitaion increase, excitation decrease and
reversion in the center controlling room are at normal state, and the performanc of the
indicator lights
Channel A
Results:
Channel B
Results:
Channel C
Results:
16. V/f restraint

The V/f value in the automatic channel is 1.100, which can be modified through ID
[84]; when the frequency is smaller than 45Hz, the reulator would reverse
automatically without the possibility of modifying the reversion frequency.
When
the frequency is lower than the +-1% of the rated value, the change of the voltage is
less than +-0.25% of the rated value.
17. Frequency test

Change the spinning speed of the machine, record the terminal voltage and the
frequency, standard requirement: When the frequency is lower than the +-1% of the
rated value, the change of the voltage is less than +-0.25% of the rated value.
Frequency
PT voltage
Reversion
18. Power disappearance test

Supplied by a single circuit power, the excitaion system should be able to work
properly. Before the test check the correctness of the 24v power supply
19. Overexcitation restraint test

Record
the current value as the restraint value, lower the termianal voltage and
modify the overexcitation restraint value, re-excitate and check the stability of the
7-65

system after over-excitation.
Results:
20. Intelligent current balancing regulation

Find out the biggest output current power controller in the condition of automatic
current balancing off state. Then turn on the automatic current balancing and regulate
the deviation of it at the maximum output, till the effect is satisfactory.
21. Phase step test

To test the dynamic function of the system, with the standard rule of DL/T650-1998:
the phase step quantity as much as 5% rared value of the generator, the overshoot
quantity <30% of the phase step quantity, vibration <3 times, ascending time <0.6s,
regulation time<5s.
GB/T7409.3-1997: In thecondition of no load, when the rated phase step is +-10%,
the generator voltages overshoot<50%, vibration<3 times, and regulation time<10s.
On the touching screen there are 5% and 10%phase step bottons to choose from,
both are first step up then step down. Record the data:
Phase step Pre-step terminal Overshoot
quantity
voltage
Vibration
quantity
Regulation
time
22. Devide the de-excitater switch test from no load

Devide the de-excitater switch when there is noload, record the data.
Local manual switch off the de-excitator switch, record the parameter if terminl
vltage, excitation current, de-excitation time by the commissioning soft ware. Observe
the de-excitation effect.
Results:
Attention: refer to the commissioning scheme for the system out of factory.
7-66
VII.
Load close loop test
1. On-line
Attention: for the very first time of interconnetion, it is best to set in the channel
A/B/C manual mode.
1) After the voltage rise to a set value from the 0-load, the system can realize the
interconnection. Check the regulator screen, make sure the indicator light is on for
interconnection and at the same time check the correctness of the active and reactive
power.
Results:
Attention: if the result is more or less the same as the results mearsured by the
monitoring system, this shows the correctness of the PT and CT. If there is a great
difference, 2 reasons may be accountable: (1)the disagreeable parameters of PT , CT
actual value and the value set by the factory (2) there is something wrong with the
polarity of the PT and CT .
After making sure that the above result is cirrect, switch the regulator in the
automatic mode in channel A/B.
2) After interconnection, dont increae or reduce excitaion for the time being, and
observe the reactive power immediately. If it is too large or negative, this proves that
the terminal voltage differs greatly from the eletric net voltage, great vibration occurs
in the process of interconnection and it is necessary to regulate the terminal voltage.
When adopting the automatic synchronic apparatus interconnection, operators
should regulate the voltage deviation setting, generally, to shrink it.
When adopting the system voltage tracking interconnection, operators should
regulate the ID[5] : Kus, to make sure the system voltage<terminal voltage so that
theres no vibration in interconnetion.
Results:
2. Interconnection with negative charge

After the regulation in intrcinnection, the generators then can add active and
reactive load normally.
7-67

Attention: in this process, if the power controller current balancing coefficient
doesnt meet the requiry, operators can modify the intelligent coefficient on the screen
of the power controller.
3. Calibration check for active power reactive power and the

generator current
When the generator is jeavily loaded, calibrate the display of activ epower, reactive
power and the generator current.
A power coefficient
A generator current coefficient
B power coefficient
B generator current coefficient
4. Calibration check of the system voltage

Make sure the PT is connected, modify the parametr ID[18] , and make the screen
show the system voltage , regulate ID[5] , to make the system voltage =the terminal
PT voltage.
A voltage coefficient
B voltage coefficient
5. Deviation polarity check

Outo-of-factory value is usually set as 0.
The polarity and size of the deviation rate should be modified with the command on
site
Check the correctness of the deviation rate polarity.
Channel A
Results:
Channel B
Results:
Attention: the grade and the polarity can be set through the functional keys on the
dommissioning soft ware. When the polarity is positive, as the grade increases the
reactive power decreases.
Special attention:
when the generator takes the mode of large-scale wiring, the
regulator can only adopt the positive mode. Or the machine set may jump.
6. Under-exciation restraint test

7-68
7. Over-excitaion restraint test

8. Constant Q regulation test
9. Constant PF regulation test
10. The throw of negative charge test and the generator voltage
regulator test
VIII.
PSS commissioning test
1. Testing conditions
2. Testing instruments
3. The math mode of AVR
4. The math mode of PSS
5. Testing wiring
6. Frequency test of AVR and PSS
7. Phase step of no-loaded generator
8. Frequency test without compensation
9. PSS parameter design and setup
10. The frequency test with compensation
11. PSS input test
12. Generator loaded phase step reaction test
13. Measurement of PSS critical point interest add
14. PSS anti-regulaion test
15. PSS automatic input and output test
7-69
16. Remote control of PSS control

Signature of the operators on site:
Powerplant:
Electrimachenical installation unit:
The research institute of the electric test:
Guangzhou electric equipment scientific institute of
Date of test
7-70
Users guideManual operation
Chapter8 Mannul operation

1.1 Running modes of the generator ........................................... 4
1.2 No-load running of generator................................................ 4
1.3 Generator networking load running ...................................... 5
1.4 AVR functions working in power network............................ 6
2. Operation and display .......................................................... 9

2.1 Brief introduction.................................................................. 9
2.2 Examinition of the excitation system before starting up ..... 10
2.3 Operation of regulator before startup. ................................. 10
2.3.1 The switch of the regulator ........................................ 10
2.3.2 Set up for other operational mode ............................. 10
2.4 Operation of power controller before startup ...................... 12
2.4.1 Check of the state of power controller ............................. 12
2.4.2 Check of the power controller rectifier bridge................ 12
2.4.3 Check of the power controller fan power switch ............ 13
2.5.1 Check of the de-exciter switch .................................. 13
2.5.2 Check of the input circuit check of the excitation
power .................................................................................. 13
2.6
Operation of flashing ...................................................... 13
2.6.1 Residual voltage flashing stopping /flashing starting....... 13

8-1
2.6.2 Process of flashing..................................................... 13

2.6.3 Flashing failure .......................................................... 14
2.7
Zero voltage rising.......................................................... 14
2.8
Normal pre-set value voltage rising................................ 14
2.9
Manual mode .................................................................. 14
2.10 Generator rising .............................................................. 15

2.11 Channel tracking and switching...................................... 16
2.11.1
The standby relationship between cahnnels .............. 16
2.11.2 Channel tracking function starting and stopping...... 16

2.11.3 Manual switching between channels........................ 16
2.11.4 Automatic switching between channels ................... 17
2.12 System voltage tracking.................................................. 18
2.13 Increasing/decreasing operation ..................................... 18
2.14 Inverted and de-excitation .............................................. 19
2.15 V/f limit .......................................................................... 19
2.16 Recitifier operation ......................................................... 19
2.16.1
Fan control........................................................... 19
2.16.2
other operations ................................................... 20
2.17 De-exciter operation ....................................................... 20

2.18 Interconnection of generator units .................................. 20
2.19 Constant Q regulation or constant PF regulation ............ 21
2.20 Deviation coefficient setting ........................................... 21
8-2
2.21 Power system stabilizer starting/stopping (PSS) ............ 22

2.22 Excitation system cutoff by generator units fault ........... 23
2.23 Analogue quantity display .............................................. 23
2.24 Statuses and alarm messages .......................................... 24
3. Running of the system ........................................................ 25

3.1 Examination before starting ................................................ 26
3.2 Starting-up procedures ........................................................ 26
3.3 Examination during running ............................................... 27
3.4 Stopping procedures............................................................ 28
3.5 Urgent stopping................................................................... 28
4. Regulator panel indicating signal definitions ................... 28

4.1 DSP board ........................................................................... 28
4.2 I/O board ............................................................................. 29
8-3
This chapter is concerned about running guide of excitation system and particularly
things to be taken care of to avoid any fault during operation of the system. Safety
prevention measures to be taken are illustrated. Working characteristics of the
generator and that of the excitation system under automatic and manual operation
modes.
1.1 Running modes of the generator

The generator can run in the following modes.
1) No-load running with no load for the generator
2) Generator on load running
3) Loaded not networking running of generator with plant power.
Conditions for loaded running of generator with plant power are basically the
same with those for no-load running.
1.2 No-load running of generator

In case of no-load running of generator, its generator voltage equals to induce
electromotive force of rotor. With rotating speed as constant, terminal voltage of
generator lies directly in excitation current. Within rated voltage scope of generator, a
more or less linear relationship exists between terminal voltage of generator and
excitation current. If generator voltage exceeds rated value, a saturation effect occurs,
which is in essence decided by stator iron-core design. If the generator voltage is
increased further, the excitation current shall be increased greatly.
8-4
Ug
Saturation
Ugn
Generator
rated
voltage
No load
field current
Ifo
If
Graph 1 No-load characteristics
1.3 Generator networking load running

In case of loaded running of generator, the current passing stator winding incurs
voltage drop when it passes synchronous reactance. The terminal voltage will drop if
excitation current keeps constant. Here the excitation system has the function of
preventing voltage drop through changing excitation current.
The whole range of stable running condition is usually described by power circle
graph as Graph 2.
P
Active power
Rated power
Drive limit
Load angle
limit
Generator
Pf
Field current
limit
Sn
-Q
-1
1
xd
under
excited
Graph 2
+1
+ Q Reactive
Ifo
Motor
over
excited
Power circle graph of synchronous generator

8-5
Power

Usually the upper semicircle is used to describe running of generator. The circle
has the origin of the coordinates as its center and rated apparent power Sn as its
semidiameter. Apparent power Sn is determined by allowed temperature of stator
windings. The allowed running range of generator is determined by drive limit on
active power axis. In addition, the running scope of reactive power axis is limited by
overexcitation rotor windings heat design while under excited scope is limited by
stability limit. Overexcitation limit scope is mainly determined by rated excitation
current. Rated working point of generator is intersection point of stator and rotor heat
limits. Within underexcitation scope, thermal capacity of heat does not work and it is
important to keep synchronization of the generator. Load angle of one certain working
point can by read from inclination between reactive power axis and excitation power
Pf in the graph. Usually the synchronous generator works in slightly lagging reactive
power scope. But on the other hand, to cater to condition of power network, proper
torque reserves shall be ensured for power network faults.
1.4 AVR functions working in power network

The voltage regulation system ensures that excitation current value necessary for
current working conditions shall be automatically regulated, which means on the one
hand, to keep the value required by stable running constant, on the other hand, it can
be quickly regulated in case the running conditions change.
z
The line voltage shall keep within the acceptable limit.
Stable distribution of reactive power shall be guaranteed among several

parallel generators in power plant.
In the power network, distribution of reactive power should ensure minimum

line loss and the reactive power should keep constant in case of load changes.
The generator shall be ensured to run within safety limit.
Under stable running conditions, in purpose of voltage automatic regulation, the

natural characteristics of generator and power network shall be partly corrected. To
this end, VR is also subject to influence by the reactive current.
8-6

In most cases, the generator is wired in power network through step-up transformer.
For this reason, reactance passing transformer and power network has natural
deviation rate with declining characteristics as in Graph 3. It shall be emphasized that
deviation rate represents only the relationship between reactive power variation and
voltage variation. And it cannot be mixed up with departure of proportional regulator.
Departure of contemporary regulator is set value minus actual value, usually 0~0.5%.
Effective reactive deviation rate can be set between -15% to +15%.
For the parrellel generators, in order to rationally allocate the reacitive power, it
must be set as the positive reacitive power. Usually the reactive deviation rate is set
between 4% and 10%, i.e. generator voltage declining value (4% for example) in case
of 1 p.u. reactive power.
In some cases, deviation rate shall be set as negative to compensate for voltage drop
incurred by passing of current in step-up transformer.
UG
pos. static
neg. static
-Q
+Q
Graph 3 Deviation rate of AVR

Immediate reaction of AVR is required for load shedding. In this case, the
generator voltage changes immediately with disconnection of main switch, which is a
major quality characteristic of VR or excitation system.
8-7

Ug
Overvoltage relay
with constant field current

with AVR (static excitation system)
Uo
IQ x Xd "
t
t=0
1 Sec.
Graph 4 Load shedding

The drop of reactive power to zero inevitable incurs increase of voltage: U = IQ.
Xd". For example, subtransient reactance is 0.2 p.u., and if 0.5 p.u. reactive power is
thrown off, there will be 10% voltage increase instantly, which can not be decreased
by any regulation. If there is no AVR, the voltage will increase continually until it
reaches the maximum value determined by synchronous reactance. The time of
voltage increasing is determined by no-load time constant Tdo.
The voltage is not allowed to increase further if there is VR. After a period of
regulation, the voltage returns to its original value. Quick achievement of this purpose
lies in design and type of excitation system. For static excitation system, it directly
regulates the excitation current of generator and the reaction time is shortest. However,
3-exciter excitation system must go through time constant of additional exciter. If
excitation system works under manual mode, the excitation current will be controlled,
which results in undesired increase of generator voltage until overvoltage relay of
generator protection trips the switch and incurs de-excitation of generator. To avoid
this phenomenon, set value of excitation current regulator shall return to no-load
excitation current value when main circuit switch of generator disconnects.
A short circuit of a certain distance will also incur great drop of reactive power
of generator.
8-8

UG
with voltage regulator
UO
with constant field current
t=0
1 sec
Graph 5 Short circuit of a certain distance

For example, fault of a certain long distance incurs overvoltage and overcurrent
within a very short time. The excitation regulator provides maximum excitation
current to maintain the voltage. After the protection device eliminates the fault, the
generator voltage will grow as the load lightens. This overvoltage is regulated to its
original value by VR.
2. Operation and display

The excitation system is composed of a set of machines installed in power plant. In
normal cases it is subject to remote operation by the control room. Local control
screen directly installed on front panel of excitation system is only used in
commissioning, testing or urgent control. If a highly efficient control system is
installed in the power plant, the commands to excitation system are issued by this
control system.
Operators shall be familiar with operation of excitation system, design of display
unit, functions of commands for excitation system as well as good operation of these
control commands and display unit. The operators shall, through operation of the
excitation system, ensure that the generator fits in with working conditions in power
plant and power network.
There are two modes of control for excitation system as follows.
Remote control------through monitoring system in control room
Local control--------Local human-machine interface integrated in excitation system.
8-9
2.2 Examinition of the excitation system before starting up

Make sure the normality of other units besides the excitation system in the
generator
Make sure that the external AC/DC correctly sent into the excitation system
Make sure that there are no messages of error or alarm inside the excitation system
Make sure that the switch inside the systen and the one in the controlling power
are correctly switched on.
2.3 Operation of regulator before startup.

2.3.1 The switch of the regulator
Switch on the AC/DC power, switch the microcomputer switch, and tune the botton
of rectifier / reversion to the position of rectifier.
The AC, DC switch are bipolar air switches, which are generally installed in on the
rail on the right of the rectifier. Turn on the switch, the power is on, and the regulator
begins to work.
The microcomputer switch is installed at the rear of the rectifier
with each channel corresponding to a switch. When the switch is turned off and
corresponding electricity is off, operators can change the board, with the
rectifying/reversion switch on the front door of the regulator.
Check the status of the regulator

(1) No. 4 light on the I/O board is flashing
(2) The communicative indicator lights are at normal state
(3) The regulator choosing the operation of set A, the standby of set B, and both sets
are automatic.
Indicators of channel A working and channel B stand by are
on, and the automatic indicative light is on too.
Default status
2.3.2 Set up for other operational mode

(1) Enter into the display-selectionsetup of operation mode on the
human-machine interface.
Modify the regulator and if it cannot work properly,
carry out step 2 and change the setup.

(2) Change the setup; enter the display of operational mode setting. The following
8-10

functional keys are shown, which can be operted on directly. When the function
is on,
the indicator light turns red and the characters on the bottons change too.
Select the manual operation menu in the setup display, operators can set the
display manually.
On this display, operators can set automatic mode or the manual
mode in channel A/B.
8-11

Other functions can be realized through this display, the default value as
following:
Order
Name
Dfault value
Explanation
Channel tracking
Channel tracking on
Us tracking
The last setting
No.
Electricity
drop
memory
3
Constant Q regulation
Constant rgulation off
Setup on demand after

interconnection
Constant
PF Constant PF off
Setup on demand after
regulation
5
Rsidual
interconnection
voltage Last setting
Electricity
excitation
memory
Deviation setting
Pressur builtup from Pressur
drop
Last setting
builtup
from
0-loaded
0-loaded off
Manual operation
Automatic operation Set

A/B
PSS operation
Last setting
Electricity
drop
memory
2.4 Operation of power controller before startup

2.4.1 Check of the state of power controller
Make sure that the switch pulse cut is off, showing that the normal output of the
pulse in this power controller.
2.4.2 Check of the power controller rectifier bridge

Make sure that the DC switch is on, showing that this rectifier bridge can work
properly
8-12
2.4.3 Check of the power controller fan power switch

Make sure the fan power switch is on, showing that this fan can work properly
after receiving the startup command.
Operation of de-excitater before startup
2.5.1 Check of the de-exciter switch

Make sure that the switch is in the position of brake up or brake down and the
status display on the de-exciter corresponding to the actual position of the switch.
When the switch is in the position of brake up, on the de-exciter display,
operators can press botton F1 to enter the operational display of the switch, as well as
turn on the switch.
When the switch is in the position of brake down, operators can turn off the
switch.
Attention in the condition of interconnection, this operation should be avoided for
fear of excitation loss in the machine units.
2.5.2 Check of the input circuit check of the excitation power

Make sure that the initiation power switch is on, but even when auxiliary power is
adopted, it can supply normal initiation power.
2.6 Operation of flashing

2.6.1 Residual voltage flashing stopping /flashing starting
Enter into Other Settings window and you can select starting or stopping of residual
voltage flashing function.
2.6.2 Process of flashing

Upon starting of residual voltage flashing function, when there is starting command,
residual voltage flashing is started first. If voltage building is not successful within
10S, flashing power is started. When voltage is built up to 10% or flashing time limit
is reached, flashing power is switched off automatically.
Upon stopping of residual voltage flashing, when there is automatic or manual
starting command, flashing power is immediately started automatically. When voltage
8-13

is built up to 10% or flashing time limit (10S) is reached, flashing power is
automatically switched off.
2.6.3 Flashing failure

In case of automatic flashing, if the voltage does not reach 10% of rated terminal
voltage when flashing time limit is reached, the flashing failure signal will be issued.
2.7 Zero voltage rising

When the power is on, the default zero voltage rise function exits.
Enter into Other Setting window of human-machine interface; select Zero Voltage
Rise
function
launching.
Check
Voltage
Pre-set
Value
displayed
on
human-computer interface as 10%.

After voltage building, the increasing /decreasing excitation button can be used to
regulate terminal voltage.
2.8 Normal pre-set value voltage rising

After power is on, the default voltage rising is executed as per normal pre-set
value. The pre-set value can be set srbitarily through the commissioning software,
for detail information about the ways, refer to chapter 5.
Operators can also enter I to the initiation operation window to select the function
of exit. They can enter and check the HMI the preset value as the set A/B Ug.
By means of the conventional pressure building, the voltage at the terminal set
with the set value, after that the voltage can be changed by increasing/decresing the
terminal voltage.
Attention: Professionals design the preset value of the volt; ordinary persons
should not mdify the data arbitrarily.
2.9 Manual mode

There is Automatic Running mode (constant terminal voltage regulation) and
Manual Running mode (constant excitation current regulation) for Channels A and B.
But there is only Manual Running mode for Channel C.
The default running mode for Channels A and B is Automatic Running mode.
8-14

Before start-up, the current set value for Manual Running mode is always the
lowest limit (displayed as 0%).
After excitation voltage building up by auto, the current set value will be
automatically adapted to voltage set value, and voltage set value will be adapted to
voltage set value until outputs of the two regulation modes are the same to ensure
non-interfering switching between the two running modes.
Manual running mode is testing running mode or play as a transission of PT error.
In normal operation there is no need to adopt the manual mode.
2.10 Generator rising

The voltage can be controlled by both the remote or local control.
The remote
control startup command is sent out when the monitoring system dectects the
spinning speed of the machine units reaches 95%. The startup command is required
to be connected with the system with contactor of no power supply, the time for
connection shold not be less than 15seconds. The monitoring system then sends
out command to the excitation system, which can be recovered in 15 seconds. Or it
can be restore after the voltage rise is successfully done, or the state may be kept for
the whole period.
The local exictaion is carried out through the touching screen on the HMI.
Pay
attention to the more than 5 seconds of initiation.

When the regulator receives command of flashing, it will build voltage according
to the preset value. When the 0 voltage rising is on, the steady voltage value is
about 10% of the terminal rated voltage; the 0 voltage rise is off, the steady value
of volt is the preset value, generally 100%.
If it is new generator or after big maintance of the generator, the system should
adopt the way of 0 voltage rising mode. After this test, voltage can be established
through the conventional method, in which the soft flashing is adopted. With the
increasing of the terminal voltage until it reaches to the preset value, without
ovrshoot.
8-15
2.11 Channel tracking and switching

2.11.1 The standby relationship between cahnnels
The regulator concludes 3 channels A/B/C. Channel A is the main operating
channel while channel B is the main standby channel and C the main auxiliary one.
Channel A and B are of same structure in both hardware and software, which can
perform all the functions of the regulator. Channel C is just a simple analogue
channel with only the manual mode.
When channel A is working, channel B/ C can
be manually selected as the standby channels. When channel B is at work it is

defaulted that the channel C is the standby channel. Channel A never acts as the
standby channel. When channel C is at work, there s no standby channel.
The indicator lights and the bottons on the front door of the regulator can show
and control the status of the working channel as well as the standby channels.
The
channel switch logic is detailedly described in 2.11.3 in this chapter.

When re-electrified, the regulator defaults that the channel A is working and
channel B is acting as a standby channel, with both of the channel A/B in the
automatic mode.
2.11.2 Channel tracking function starting and stopping

After the system is power on again, the default Channel Tracking function is
launched.
After tracking function is activated, the non-working channels always tracks
working channel. For example, if Channel A is working, it will be tracked by
Channels B and C; if Channel B is working, it will be tracked by Channels A and C; if
Channel C is working, it will be tracked by Channels A and B. the tracking priciple:
matched controlling signals
Attention: the tracking of different channels is backed up not only by the channel
tracking function starting but also the R631 signals.
2.11.3 Manual switching between channels

During the working process, if working channels are to be switched manually, the
8-16

Channel Tracking function shall be activated and control signals of current working
channel and of the target channel to be switched to shall be examined, which shall be
ensured to be fundamentally identical to avoid fluctuating switch.
The manual switching can be realized through the 4 bottons channel A working
channel
B/C
working,
working/standby.
channel
working/standby,
channel
There are 5 indicator lights channel A working, channel B
working, channel C working, channel B standby and channel C standby to

show the status of the channels.
The logic of manual switch:
(1) In case Channel A is working press the botton channel B working/stand by and
the channel B may be set as the standby channel.
If
channel C working
/standby is pressed, channel C is choosed as the standby channel.

(2) In case channel A is working, press the botton channel B/C working , the
channel could be shifted to the standby channels. The standby channels can be
channel B/C.
(3) When channel B is working, channel C is defaulted as the standby channel, press
the botton channel C working/standby, the working channel could be shifted to
channel C.
(4) When channel C is working, there is no standby channel. Press the botton
channel B working/standby, channel B could be shifted to and channel C being
the standby channel.
(5) When channel B/C is working, press the botton of channel A working, channel
A could always been switched to, and the working channels of B/C automatically
becaome the standby channels.
2.11.4 Automatic switching between channels

In case of an accident in working channel, it will be automatically switched to
standby channel.
Power fault
Pulse fault
8-17

Regulator fault
PT fault
2.12 System voltage tracking

The excitation systrm has the function of system voltage tracking , when this
function is launched, the regulator would automatically regulate the output of
excitation current and control the terminal voltage at the generator, making it
concorded with the system voltage. In this way, in the interconnection of the
generators, the crush caused by the great deviation between the machine voltage and
the system voltage would be greatly reduced.
This function can be started or stopped through the HMI of the regulator, and the
status set can be finished without power.
Only when the calibration regulator voltage value measured on site is correct can
this function be started.
When the following conditions are met for execution the
voltage tracking is valid:

The stator current <10% and the circuit breaker at the exit of the generator
is off
System voltage > 80%
Channel A/B in working mode
Attention: (1) generally speaking, in the commissioning of the excitation system,
under the function of system voltage tracking, the terminal voltage is somewhat
higher than the system voltage to avoid in-phase operation when the machines are
interconnected.
(2) Many power plants have the automatic in-phase apparatus as well as the
terminal voltage regulation before interconnection.
If this function is launched, the
function in the exictation system of system voltage tracking should exit.
2.13 Increasing/decreasing operation

Increasing /decreasing excitation operation can be executed closely or remotely.
The terminal voltage shall be regulated in case of no load and reactive power is
regulated in case of load.
8-18

Increasing /decreasing excitation operation is effective only in running channel.
The increasing /decreasing excitation contact has anti-sticky function and valid
continuing time for increasing excitation or decreasing excitation is 4S.
2.14 Inverted and de-excitation

In case of a stopping generator command or in case commutation/inversion switch
on regulator panel is switched to the inverting position, inverting and de-excitation is
executed upon satisfaction of the following requirements.
Generating set disarrangement
Stator current < 10%
Attention: for the sake of reliable inverted and de-excitation, the holding time for
the stopping command: no less than 10seconds of the hydroelectric machine, and no
less than 15 seconds of the heat-electric machine.
2.15 V/f limit

The genrator operated no-loaded, the regulator A/B automatically run, if the ratio
between the terminal voltage and the frequency reaches the preset value of the V/f
value, the V/f limit would take place to limit the terminal voltage and keep the ratio
below the V/F limit to prevent overexcitation. At the same time, the system would
automatically lock the command of excitation increase. The V/f value can be set
through the regulating software.
When the frequency of the generator set is lower than 45Hz, and the regulator
receives the startup command, the V/F restraint signal would be sent out too.
In the no-loaded situation of the generator, and if the operators detect the V/f
limit signal, exictation decreasing should be carried out immediately till the signal
diminished. If the excitation function is invalid, operators can give the stopping
command or directly switch off the de-excitater switch.
2.16 Recitifier operation

2.16.1 Fan control
In the normal operation of the excitation system, the startup/stopping control is
8-19

automatically carried out. For anther part, through the operation of keys on the
recitifier display, operators can turn on and off the fans.
Conditions for fan automatic startup: with a startup command signal R651 or the
output current of this recitifier is larger than 100A.
Condictions for fan automatic stopping: the startup command disappear and the
current <50A.
When there is a double fan in the intelligent recitifier, operators can choose any of
them as the primary use and the other the standby. In the normal performace of the
fans, only the main fan is in use. If there is a start up command but errors are detected,
signals of fan power error would be issued and at the same time, the standby fan is
qutomatically launced.
2.16.2 other operations

other operations includ:
calibration of recitifier output current
wind tempreture calibration
automatic current balancing calibration
attention: operators had better first read the HMI chapter and carry out the
procedure according to the explanations in that chapter.
2.17 De-exciter operation

The operations include:
The output exciation current calibrtion
The output excitation voltage calibration
The rotor temperature calibration
attention: operators had better first read the HMI chapter and carry out the
procedure according to the explanations in that chapter.
2.18 Interconnection of generator units

After successfully establishing the voltage of the generator, the in-phase apparatus
intrconnnection can be launched. Operators should keep a close eye on the reactive
8-20

power alteration after interconnection. Generally it is required that the positive
reactive value becomes smaller.
Attention: if the reactive power is negative, it might be that the terminal volage is
lower than the system voltage. Otherwise, reactive power is larger than rated value,
the terminal voltge is larger than the system voltage. In both of these occurrences,
the system voltage traching parameter should be modified.
2.19 Constant Q regulation or constant PF regulation

If operators want to choose this function, please enter the window of opeation
mode set on the regulator screen when the generator is operating with negative
charge. Or the controlling system gives command through the serial communication.
This regulation is realized through the change of voltage in the automatic voltage
regulator, which will work slowly in the operation. So if there are any problems in the
electricnet this function would not be affected.
At the moment of entering this mode, there would be no vibration. This is because
ahead of this the preset value is always the current value. After entring the mode, the
meaning of excitation de/in crese has changed. Its function becomes to set the
reactive power or the power coefficient.
After entering into this mode, the exictaion system would automatically regulate
the excitation output according to the active power coefficient to make sure the value
set meets the requirement. This is done automatically. If there is increasing external
signals, the preset value would change accordingly.
In any of the following conditions, this function exits:
No internonnection command
Staotor current<10%rated value
Microcomputer manually operated
Regulator operats at channel C
2.20 Deviation coefficient setting

Enter into the window of operational setup, choose the function of deviation
coefficient setting, and enter the window of deviation coefficient setting.
8-21
There are 31 grades of the deviation rate. Click the display gram and there will be a
number input box. Click the numbers in this box and operator can set the deviation
coefficient rate.
After the value setting click the botton confirm and see if the
feedback value agrees with the setting value.

Attention: the last step should never be negalected because if the feedback doesnt
agree with the set one, the setting is invalid.
2.21 Power system stabilizer starting/stopping (PSS)

The PSS can resist the low-frequent vibration. After selecting the PSS, when the
power of the generator is larger than that of the PSS input power, the regulator would
turn on PSS automatically; if the genrators active power is lower than the PSS exit
power, the regulator would automatically exit the PSS. The regulating software, based
on the rated visual capacity of the generator, can set this. Before PSS operation, the
parameters should be set and tested by concerned professional.
The exit of PSS can be done through HMI in the regulator. The process as follows:
(1) In the window of the regulator screen, and select the item of PSS operation,
there would be a code emtry box.
8-22
(2) Input your code and clich enter. If the code is correct, the operator enters ointo
the operational window.
Click the start and shut down of its functions, the PSS
operates.
(3) If the code is wrong, there would be a error dialogue box. At this moment the
users have to click the go back botton and return to the upper grade of the
menu.
2.22 Excitation system cutoff by generator units fault

In case of fault in generator units or excitation equipment, excitation system is
automatically cut off and de-excitation switch is switched off at the same time. After
the excitation system is cut off in case of fault, the local control display screen shall
display alarm. Professionals shall manage the fault. After the fault is eliminated, the
excitation system can be started again.
2.23 Analogue quantity display

Generally only excitation current and excitation voltage signals are transmitted
from exciter to the control room. Other displays required by running of the generator,
such as generator voltage, generator current, active power and reactive power etc are
provided by the system.
8-23
2.24 Statuses and alarm messages

There are a large amount of status information and alarm messages in excitation
system be transmitted to monitoring system with contact or through
commnunication modes. Corresponding see illustrations for detailed information.
The following signals are the most fundamental but not limited to these.
z Channel A is working
z Channel B is working
z Channel B is standby
z Channel C is working
z Channel C is standby
z Automatic mode
z Manual mode
z De-excitation switch Open
z De-excitation switch Close
z PSS Starting
z PSS Stopping
z Interconnection
z Constant power coefficient /constant reactive power regulation
z Over-excitation limit operation
z Force excitation operation
z Under excitation limit operation
z V/f limit operation
z Stator current limit operation
z PT fault: 1PT fault2PT fault
z Overvoltage protection
z DC disappear
z AC disappear
z Flashing failure
z Reversion failure
8-24

z Set A fault: set A regulator fault, testing fault and power fault
z Set B fault: set B regulator fault, testing fault and power fault
z Set C fault
z Communication fault
z Pulse fault
z In-phase fault
z 1# power controller stopping
z 1# power controller fault (including fan fault, quick-reacting fuse blow,
wind temperature fault, pulse fault etc)
z 24V power fault: 24V set I fault 24V set II fault
z CT fault
z Low exciatation current fault
z Low frequency
Besides, the signals sent out from the exciatation transformer controller
z Level 1 overtemperature alarm for excitation transformer
z Level 2 overtemperature tripping for excitation transformer
3. Running of the system

The following prerequisites about safe running shall be strictly adhered to.
Firstly regulation shall be completed successfully.
Maintenance shall be planned and done regularly.
8-25

Any fault, which has occurred, has been completely eliminated.
Any modification of set value (parameter) has been examined and tested.
3.1 Examination before starting

Before starting of excitation system, it shall be ensured that all required powers
have been working, that it can be started safety and that the following examinations
have been made.
Maintenance of system has been completed.
The control and power cubicle has been ready for working and properly
locked.
The generator output is no-loaded. Input/output cable from excitation
transformer to exciter has been cut off (Temporary grounding wire disposed).
Control power of De-excitation switch and regulator power have been on.
No alarm and fault message has occurred.
The excitation system has been switched to automatic mode.
The generator has reached rated rotating speed (check rotating speed on gauge
display).
3.2 Starting-up procedures

1
Operation
Display
Control
Field circuit breaker close
Signal light on
De-excitation
switch
closed
2
Excitation system starts up
Signal light on
Voltage built up within

5-15 seconds
Generator no-load running
8-26

3
Excitation system prepares for low-load
Generator
running.
regulated to set value.
Select
decrease/increase
the
excitaion
button
to
voltage
is
regulate
generator voltage as same as power

network voltage.
4
When
power
network
voltage
and
Reactive
power
of
generator voltage are synchronous, switch
generator is close to
off the main circuit switch of generator.
zero.
Generator low-load running

Select the excitation decrease/increase
Regulate
button
voltage so that the
to
set
reactive
power
of
generator within desired running limits
generator
generator
produces
certain reactive power.
3.3 Examination during running

During running process the following examinations shall be done regularly.
a) In the controlling room
Running limiter no operation.
Set value of running limiter does not reach the limit value.
Channel tracking is done properly and switching is ready.
Excitation current, generator voltage and reactive power are stable.
It is recommended that regulators be swiftly switched regularly manually to test
manual mode or standby channels.
b) Exciter
No alarm operation
No abnormal noise.
8-27
3.4 Stopping procedures

Operation
1
Display
Control
Generator disconnects with power grid

-
Reactive power is decreased by voltage set
value of generator.
Active power is decreased by regulation of
steam or hydroelectric turbines.
Main circuit switch of generator is switched
off.
2
Excitation system shutdown:
Generator
voltage
Upon receipt of shutdown command,
decreases to zero within
excitation system inverted de-excitation
seconds.
Terminal voltage is less than 10%. Excitation

devised initialized and wait for next startup.
3.5 Urgent stopping

In certain cases, faults in many peripheral types of equipment may incur a situation
where neither remote control nor a site control works in excitation system. In spite of
this, it shall also be possible to switch off excitation system. The urgent shutdown cuts
off genertor and excitation system but power in excitation system is not switched off.
Operators shall know how to shut it down in urgent situations.
4. Regulator panel indicating signal definitions

4.1 DSP board
Indicator light No.
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
Function
On when powered on
Frequency in the machine set lower than
Frequency in the machine set higher than
Working flashing
On when sampling
8-28
4.2 I/O board

Function
Code No.
Input of channel R695
DI No.
CodeNo.
Function
23
24
R671
Pulse error
21
22
19
20
R696
System tracking
tracking
input
N04
17
18
Pressure built-up
from 0-load
Set B operation
R662
15
16
R664
Set C operation
Channel address
ADDS
13
14
R660
Set A operation
N03
11
12
TEST
10
R653
Startup command R651
Reversion
de-excitaiton
Electric
brsking N01
N02
R652
input
PSS on
R692
Circuit
breaker
closed
Excitation
BIN1
BIN2
R607
R611
increse
Function
Excitation
decrese
CodeNO.
Program
CodeNO. Function
1
In-phase fault
Working flashing
modification
Over exciatation
PT fault
PTB
R631
10% Ug
40%Ug
R632
WDOG
Fault testing
8-29
Users GuideMaintenance and fault handing
Chapter9 Maintenance and trouble

shooting
1.1 Safety rules............................................................................ 3
1.2 Consequences as result of negligence ................................... 4
1.3 Requirements with operators................................................. 4
1.4 Urgency illustrution .............................................................. 5
1.5 First-aid measures for electric devices .................................. 5
2. Open-loop test ....................................................................... 5

2.1 Wiring ................................................................................... 5
2.2 Safety measures..................................................................... 8
2.3 Requirements of maintainers................................................. 8
2.4 Urgency handling .................................................................. 9
3. Maintenance of excitation equipments ............................... 9

3.1 Brief introduction.................................................................. 9
3.2 Working conditions of maintenance.................................... 10
3.3 Maintenance schedule ......................................................... 10
3.4 Maintenance once every 3 months ...................................... 11
3.5 Maintenance once every year.............................................. 13
4. Fault handling ..................................................................... 15

4.1 Fault handling conditions.................................................... 15
9-1
4.2 Fault handling ..................................................................... 15

4.3Information table for excitation system fault and abnormal
conditions.................................................................................. 15
4.4 Technology consultation and server .................................... 27
9-2
1.1 Safety rules
There shall be alarming signs in case people may be working in the excitation
equipments. Otherwise any contact with electrified components may incur serious
personal injury. For this reason, protection measures shall be taken in design for those
components with 50V electrification in the equipments. Maintainers cannot enter into
the cabinet without certain training and necessary prevention measures.
The following illustration applies to special occasions for high voltage
excitation system.
Components (radiators, copper bars etc) in exciter, which are directly wired with
excitation transformer, subside and generator rotor field windings have extremely
high voltage and may constitute danger of electric shock in case of contact. For this
reason, safety barriers shall be installed to avoid accidental contact. For convenient
measuring of electric components in the equipment, this safety protection device shall
be a certain distance away from electrified object. Special care shall be taken that
maintainers should be subject to training, which is absolutely obligatory and
necessary.
Be careful! High voltage exists in the secondary of excitation transformer
and generator rotor field windings, it may result in
extremely great short circuit in exciter.
It must be pointed out that great danger of electric shock is existent because field
circuit breaker and discharge resistors of field circuit are directly wired with
generator rotator windings. For this reason, protection devices shall be installed in
cabinet to protect personal safety.
Maintainers shall keep away from any danger with high voltage and great current in
case of absence of protection devices.
There shall be alarm signs on the cabinet door to warn the maintainers of the
voltage (over 50V) in the cabinet, but the most important is to warn all people that the
9-3

voltage inside commutator may exceed 1000V and the current inside is quite great.
These alarm signs are also a protection measure in case the doors of controller are to
be opened during running process.
Signs
Meanings
Danger! High voltage!
The maintenance cannot be done if the voltage is not cut off or if there are no
protection measures. Otherwise the following preventions shall be taken.
Casual approaching working area is forbidden. High voltage! Danger! Shall be
marked in yellow within safety area.
The switch, which has been switched off, may be switched on again due to control
error or other reasons. To avoid this, corresponding system protection measures shall
be taken (For example, the switch can not be switched without a key to avoid
mistaken switch-on again).
1.2 Consequences as result of negligence

Any noncompliance of the safety rules may incur serious damage to the equipment.
Warning! Be careful when the system is electrified without protection
measures in cabinet. It increases danger of electric shock
both to operators and to anyone close to the equipment.
If not all of the required maintenance work or only part of it has been done, it may
incur danger and great economic loss. Especially if there is still dirt or dust residual in
commutator, it may result in high-voltage flashover danger.
1.3 Requirements with operators

Maintainers shall be acquainted with relevant materials. They shall be acquainted
with installation operations and have been subject to training for maintenance and
repair.
They shall be acquainted with control theories and corresponding operations. They
9-4

shall be acquainted with not only excitation equipment themselves (local control), but
also alarms about excitation system in the control form (remote control, See Running
Guide).
They shall have abundant experience in excitation equipment power and accidents
like urgent shutdown etc and be capable of shutting down the system in case of
urgency.
They shall be acquainted with prevention measures against accident on working site
and they shall have been subject to first-aid and firefighting training.
1.4 Urgency illustrution

Fire
Workers shall know locations of fire extinguishers and urgent exits and be able to
use fire extinguishers. There are alone, CO2 and foam fire extinguishers.
CO2 fire extinguishers are specially used for fire on electric appliances and devices,
which constitutes no direct harm to human bodies.
Foam fire extinguishers are used for articles other than electric appliances and
devices. They have direct harm to human bodies.
In case of fire in the system, first the excitation shall be cut off on spot or in the
control room. And urgent shutdown device may be used if necessary (See Running
Guide). Then all powers in the system shall be cut off.
In case of fire in electrified cabinet, use CO2 fire extinguishers only. Do not
use foam or water!
1.5 First-aid measures for electric devices

First the excitation shall be cut off on spot or in the control room. Use urgent
shutdown device (See Running Guide) if necessary and then cut off all the powers in
the system. Rescue the wounded from place of danger, make them lie low on the
ground and give them systematic aid. Consider possible consequences to the electric
devices. Call for aid.
2. Open-loop test
The open-loop test is briefly stated as follows.
2.1 Wiring
Testing wiring can be done in the following two ways.
9-5

a) Untie the terminal and system back power supply is used. This approach, using
voltage transformer, current transformer, commutating transformer etc of excitation
system itself, may detect the whole excitation system. The wiring theory system
graph is as Graph 1.
Graph 1 5-1
b) 3-phase transformer is used to simulate voltage transformer input and
rectification input. The wiring principal graph is as Graph 2.
BV1
50V~100V
AC380V
BV2
2 ()
5-2
In approach a), generator terminal outlet 3-phase disconnects. The outlet cable or
BUSBAR should be electrified in test. Note that necessary safety measures should be
taken. In approach b), lead wire from terminal voltage transformer secondary side to
excitation regulator terminal should be removed and at the same time commutator AC
9-6

input switch should be switched off to avoid voltage transformation to transformer or
transformer primary side during test; In addition, if rectification subside rated voltage
is very high, the change rate should be regulated of synchronous former side input to
lower level to ensure normal synchronous signal when synchronous change input is
low. In both approaches, rotor cable shall be relieved from field circuit breaker outlet
and electric heater or resistor shall be wired in as load (Power should be taken
consideration of. Generally speaking, controlled silicon can be switched reliably into
conduction if the excitation current is 1A or up). When load is selected, attention shall
be paid to its capacity. When the controlled silicon is switched on to the full, DC side
output voltage may reach twice of rated excitation voltage. Wire in oscilloscope at
both terminals of load to observe the output waveform of controlled silicon. Take care
that when the output maximum voltage exceeds measuring range of oscilloscope,
damping resistors shall be considered to be wired in the circuit.
a.
b.
Graph 35-3
Open-loop test: Excitation regulator buttons are at on positions. Open-loop small

current tests are done respectively in Channel A, B and C. regulates the increased or
decreased buttons respectively in Channel A and B and observes output waveform on
oscilloscope. If output waveform of controlled silicon is normal, it should be
symmetrical unlack hexwave, which varies smoothly with set value (as per increasing
excitation or decreasing excitation) from minimum to maximum under control. The
9-7

sketch map is as shown in Graph 3.
Attention: for the detailed wiring way, operators can refer to chapter 7 appendix
2.
2.2 Safety measures

In the main circuit, due to the reason that one side of field circuit breaker is directly
connected with generator rotator, that input side of commutator are directly connected
with excitation change secondary circuit windings and that main circuit has high
voltage during running process of excitation equipments, the device, during normal
running process or testing, shall avoid contact with major circuit equipment to prevent
electric shocks. Whats worth noting is that there will be overvoltages in field circuit
breaker and rotor de-excitation circuit connected with it. So any contact shall be made
with them.
Maintenance and repair shall be made when the power in the equipment is
completely off. There would better be prominent warning lines in the working area to
prevent anybody other than operators to enter. For those breakers, field circuit breaker,
isolation switch etc that cannot be switched on, anti-mistaken-switch on measures
shall be taken, e.g. a sign like Someone Working Inside. Do not switch it on. to avoid
mistaken operation and accident afterward.
Improper safety measures, such as mistaken switch on etc in maintenance, may not
only result in personal injury, but also result in damage to equipment, which will add
to maintenance expenses.
In addition, any negligence in maintenance of the equipment may affect its life span,
and its normal working if it is serious. For example, silicon components which have
not been dusted for a long time may incur Voltage flashover, affect insulation of the
main circuit etc and may result in equipment damage if it is serious.
2.3 Requirements of maintainers
Maintainers and repairers shall be acquainted with relevant drawings

and materials.
Maintainers shall have been subject to training or be acquainted with

9-8

operation and installation of the equipment with capability to complete
fully the maintenance and repairing work.
Maintainers shall know meanings of various signals during running

process of the equipment as well as corresponding countermeasures if
handling is necessary.
Maintainers shall be able to take urgent measures, such as switching off
field circuit breaker and cutting off power etc.
2.4 Urgency handling

First switch off the field circuit breaker and cut off all powers on excitation
equipments or connected to the equipments in the control form. In case of a fire, note
that CO2 fire extinguisher can be spayed directly to electric devices on fire but not
any person on fire. Foam fire extinguishers can be sprayed only to power-off electric
devices and persons on fire but not electrified ones.
Attension: for detailed information on open-loop test, operators can refer to chapter 7.
3. Maintenance of excitation equipments

Though most electrical components are not worn in spite of light aging, there are
still some electromechanical components, such as breakers, contactors, fans etc, with
mechanical wear and tear.
During running process of the equipments, fault system exercises fault detection
continually in running channel and standby channels. Even fault detecting system
itself will be detected. But fault-detecting system cannot guarantee to detect all the
faults, e.g. whether the relays are switched properly etc, so regular detection of
equipments are still necessary.
During regular examination, apart from cleaning of equipment components or
reassembly or fixing of components, following function examinations shall also be
executed.
Air circulation in power commutation makes it easy for the dust to accumulate on
silicon component surfaces. Air ventilation also accumulates dust in other circuits.
9-9

Vibration may loosen connecting places of terminals or other screws.
Due to the high voltage and great current existing in excitation circuit,
accumulation of dust on electric devices and electric conductors increases danger of
component damage incurred by voltage flashover. Regulator maintenance can greatly
decrease dangers like this.
3.2 Working conditions of maintenance

When maintenance is executed, please note conditions of the excitation system and
that different examining and maintaining items shall be done under different working
conditions.
Working condition (1), switch off all powers in excitation equipment and cut off all
electric connections.
Working condition (2), supply only plant power and DC.
Working condition (3), open-loop test conditions
Working condition (4), the equipment is running
3.3 Maintenance schedule

Sequence
No.
Items
Once every month
Once every year
Excitation transformer
1
Excitation
transformer
Check for dust, dirt and

abnormal noise etc.
Check for dust, dirt and

abnormal noise etc.
Commutator
2
Fan
Check dust, dirt, normal wind

force and abnormal noise.
Check dust, dirt, normal wind

force and abnormal noise.
Radiator, air
Check dust, dirt, running

temperature etc.
Check dust, dirt, running

temperature etc.
Controlled
silicon
Check all triggering circuits of

controlled silicon
De-exciter
Field circuit
breaker
Check dirt, contacts, explosion

chamber etc
Crowbar
Check dust, dirt etc
De-excitation
resistor
Check dust, dirt etc as well s

soundness of protective fuse
limited to non-linear resistor
de-excitation
9-10

Regulator
8
The circuit
board of
printed line
Function
examination
Channel switching (after short

period of running standby
channel, it shall be switched back
to main channel for running.)
Check fault-switching function.
The items in the above table will be illustrated in detail in the following section.
The checking every three months and the checking every year are done separately.
In the former process no maintenance is done if there is no abnormal phenomenon and
actual maintenance is done in the latter process. Cleaning is not limited to items
described in the table but in the whole excitation system, including exciter casing and
construction parts etc.
During the first year after the system is put in use, the maintenance shall be done
strictly as schedules and be adjusted after a proper maintenance time interval based on
observation of the first year. The maintenance interval shall be shortened in case of
rapid accumulation of dust and prolonged in case of good running environment and
little dust.
3.4 Maintenance once every 3 months

Maintenance once every 3 months can be done under Working condition (4)
1. Excitation voltage transformer:
Check the dust and noise of excitation transformer.
2. Power commutator
Check to see if there is serious dirt on surface and blades of fan, if the air
ventilation is proper, if there is any abnormal noise. When it is not convenient to
dismantle the fan to lubricate the rotating shaft and when the noise increases evidently,
it may be replaced upon maintenance next time.
3. Standby fan:
In case there are two fans in the rectifier cubicle, the standby fan shall also be
examined upon examination during maintenance. Apart from regular examination, the
9-11

standby fan shall also be switched on to check to see if it runs properly and then the
main fan is switched on again. Generally speaking, if the fans are installed one above
the other, the one above is the main fan. In case of necessary replacement, the main
fan shall be replaced due to long running time and wear and tear consequently. During
replacement the standby fan need not be uninstalled. In case of damaged standby fan,
the main fan shall be uninstalled firstly and then the standby fan shall be uninstalled.
The above case does not exist if the fans are installed one on the right of the other or
one in front of the other.
Check the air filter on the cubicle door. It shall be replaced if its very dirty and
hard to clean.
4. Check radiator temperature (limited to intelligent rectifier cubicle only). Under
the condition of certain output voltage, current and environment, check temperature of
display. If there is evident difference between this temperature and the one recorded
under previous similar conditions, examine carefully the fun, radiator, dirt and dust on
dust filter etc.
5. Regulator
No abnormal signal is transmitted by the regulator; Data on the display, such as
excitation voltage, excitation current, generator active power, generator reactive
power, generator voltage etc as well as reading numbers on other gauges in the control
room should be within deviation scope. If data of A and B regulators are displayed,
the parameters of the two channels should be consistent (within deviation scope).
In case the regulator is a 3-channel system, usually A channel is selected to run as
the main channel. To ensure switching function and redundant channel function are
good and proper, proper switching among the 3 channels shall be checked.
When the channels are switched manually, the switching can not be executed unless
control signals of switched channel are the same with those of the running channel. In
normal situation, the terminal voltage or reactive power shall not be fluctuated
evidently after the switching is done. In case of great fluctuation it shall be switched
back to the original running channel and it shall be checked for causes.
9-12
3.5 Maintenance once every year

The maintenance once every year, based on the maintenance once every 3 months,
is illustrated as follows.
During this process, maintenance shall be particularly done to field circuit breaker.
First examine its appearance to check to see if there is any dirt or damage. Secondly
moving contacts, which are often subject to wear and tear, shall be examined. If field
circuit breaker is rarely operated, it shall be switched on and off to see if it moves
properly to avoid accidental lock.
1. Excitation transformer
Under working condition (1), clean dust and dirt etc off the appearance of
transformer and conductor joining parts with dry cloth, vacuum cleaner or compressed
air (pressure not too great). Do not use any solvent detergent.
2. Commutator
Under working condition (2) or (3), check dust, dirt, air ventilation and noise of fan
etc. Clean the fan if necessary.
Dust net. Dust filtering net shall be cleaned or replaced if it is too dirty.
Check radiator temperature (limited to intelligent rectifier cubicle only). Under
working condition (4), under certain environmental condition and certain voltage and
current, observed displayed temperature value. In case of evident increase in
temperature compared with before, repeat step 2, and then clean the radiator as per
working condition (1): Dust it and clean it with hair brush, vacuum cleaner or
compressed air (pressure not too great). Do not use any solvent detergent.
Check to see if triggering circuit runs normally. In case of normal running, the
automatic detecting circuit detects and monitors the triggering circuit. So a group of
pulse plugs may be pulled out in open-loop test to simulate pulse fault to see if the
detecting circuit can properly execute detection.
3. De-excitation circuit and field circuit breaker
Under working condition (1), check dust, dirt and contact cauterization. Clean the
switch itself with dry cloth or hairbrush. Open the explosion chamber and check the
9-13

contact. Polish the cauterized part with fine sand paper in case of cauterization. After
there is rated current on field circuit breaker and the current is shunted, check the
explosion chamber and contact. Blow the smoke away from the explosion chamber
with compressed air. Polish the contact if it is cauterized.
Examine screw joints under working condition (1), examine screw joints on copper
bar, check to see if the screws on joints of crowbar (limited to non-linear resistor
de-excitation only) fix properly.
Check for insulation problems incurred by dirt or screw loosening: Under working
condition (1), clean the joints with dry cloth if necessary. It is recommended that one
year after it is put in use for the first time, all screws including connection terminals
shall be screwed tight. Such operation may go once every four years after this.
4. Regulator
Check to see if the printed substrate is clean. Under working condition (1), clean
the line board with compressed air (pressure not too high).
Check for dust on base pins and on joints of pluggable components on circuit
boards. If there is, it may incur make the function of circuit board out of order. Clean
it with compressed air (the pressure not too great) or vacuum cleaner. Do not use any
solvent detergent.
Regulator function checking. Under working condition (4), check to see if control
board signals are normal, if IOP displayed values are normal and if the standby
channel works normally.
5. Open-loop test
If necessary an open-loop test shall be carried out as to the whole excitation system.
During the test, simulation may be done to the control circuit apart from checking
normality of excitation output waveform. Input, output signals etc may be simulated.
Simulation shall be done selectively as per electrical atlas and corresponding test
documents.
9-14
4. Fault handling
4.1 Fault handling conditions
Before fault handling starts, read 1.2 Safety Measures first. In case of replacement
of any component in the system, all excitation powers and all external electric
connections shall be cut off to ensure personal and equipment safety. Hot plugging is
forbidden.
Some components sensitive to static induction like CMOS component are easily
damaged if they are subject to static discharging. So keep away from them. In case of
replacement of such components or installation of circuit boards with these
components, first switch off the power and you would better wear sheaths on the
wrists for discharging during operation. In urgency, touch metal part with no paint in
the casing before operation to minimized danger of damage by static to the
component.
The new component to be put in use should better be provided by our company. All
spare parts have been examined at plant and can directly replace the original
component without jumping or setting etc.
4.2 Fault handling

In most cases, the normal functions in excitation system are continually monitored
by excitation fault monitoring system. In case of any fault in these functions, the
monitoring system will issue alarm signal and give fault details. For corresponding
fault handling please see the approaches described in the following fault handling
procedures.
4.3Information table for excitation system fault and

abnormal conditions
1. Flashing failure
Conditions: The terminal voltage stays <10% rated value after receiving the startup
command or the flashing command.
Corresponding status:
9-15

(1) Initiation failure shown on the screen
(2) The output point of initiation failure connected on the IO board
(3) The regulator would stop send out triggering pulse
Possible cause, check and handling:
(1) Check if the de-excitater switch is off
(2) Check if theres remote or local reversion command
(3) Check if the DC current switch in the power controller is off
(4) Check if the pulse cut switch is in the position of on
(5) Check if the fuse is off
(6) Check if the excitation primary, secondary circuit is off
(7) Check if the rotor circuit is off
(8) Check if the excitaion power is on
(9) Check if the initiation contactor works in initiation
(10) The initiation resistor or diode off
(11) The regulator didnt receive command of initiation: with the start up command,
the No. 9 indicator light on the I/O board is off
2.deviation failure
Conditions: In no-loaded condition, after deviation command holding 10s, generator
voltage larger 10%.
(1) Display on the regulator displays deviation failure.
(2) Output contacts deviation failure will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(3) Regulator will bring deviation failure relay K03 operate and field circuit break
operate.
(1) Check if there is voltage in the PT circuit after stopping generator.
(2) Check if regulator deviation signal is normal.
3.PT failure
Conditions:
(1) A/B synchronization coefficient is equal to 0:
9-16

(2) A/B generator voltage is higher 10% rated voltage and one of 1PT /2PT measuring
voltage lower 83% of 3 phases average.
(3) A/B synchronization coefficient is unequal to 0:
(4) A/B syschronization generator is higher 20% rated voltage and higher 1PT/2PT
generator voltage and 10% rated voltage.
(1) Display on the regulator displays 1PT/2PT failure.
(2) Output contacts 1PT/2PT failure will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(3) A/B channel will automatically switch to manual mode.
(4) A/B channel will automatically switch to standby channel for operating.
(1) Check 1PT/2PT voltage is normal.
(2) See if A/B measuring voltage in the display of the regulator is normal.
(3) See if A/B synchronization voltage is normal by regulating software.
4. A/B detecting failure
Conditions:
(1) A/B testing chips have hardware or software failure
(1) Display on the regulation diaplays set A/B detecting failure.
(2) Output contacts set A/B detecting failure will contact on the Intelligentized I/O
board.
(1) Restoring terminal 1 of Chip U18/U19 holds high voltage (>4.5V) on the switch
quantity board, change capacity C17/C16.
(2) Change XT13 on the switch quatity board.
(3) Change chip U18/U19 on the switch quatity board.
5. C regulator failure
Conditions:
When start up holds:
(1) Controlling chip of set C has hardware or software or power failure.
9-17

(2) C has synchronization failure.
(1) Display on the regulation displays set C regulation failure.
(2) Output contacts set C regulation failure will contact on the Intelligentized I/O
board.
(1) Check if set C synchronization signal is normal.
(2) Restoring terminal 1 of set C chip U6 on the analogue quantity board hoids high
voltage (>4.5V), maybe photoelectricity U3 is not welded.
Change XTAL or programme chip of set C.
6. A/B power failure
Conditions:
Output voltage of set A/B +5V switch power is abnormal (disappear or higher 5.25V)
or +12V disappear.
(1) Display on the regulation displays A/B power failure.
(2) Output contacts A/B power failure will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(3) A/B regulator will automatically switch to standby channel.
(1) Measure if voltage of terminal X4:1/X4:9 and X4:3/X4:10 is normal or higher
5.25V.
(2) Measure if voltage of terminal X4:4/X4:13 and X4:3/X4:10 is disappear.
(3) Check if set A/B
+5V&+12V switch power is normal.
7. A/B regulator failure

Conditions:
When R632 signal holds (generator voltage is higher 40%), set A/B regulator
hardware or software failure.
(1) Display on the regulation displays A/B regulation failure.
(2) Output contacts A/B regulator failure will contact on the Intelligentized I/O
9-18

board.
(1) Restore A/B CPU board.
(2) A/B CPU fails and change.
(3) A/B DSP fails and change.
8. A/B pulse failure
Conditions:
Set A/B detecting chip on the switch quantity board detect one or more phase pulse
disappear when set A/B operate.
(1) Display on the regulation displays A/B pulse failure.
(2) Output contacts A/B pulse failure will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(1) Check if A/B synchronization signal is normal.
(2) A/B bring SCM failure or stopping work.change chip of pulse SCM.
(3) Check if crystalloid of A/B pulse on the switch quantity board.
9.DC 24V I section disappearance
Conditions:
Generator voltage is higher 80% rated voltage and regulator set I 24V disappear.
(1) Display on the regulation displays DC 24V I section disappearance.
(2) Output contacts DC 24V I section disappearance will contact on the
Intelligentized I/O board.
(1) Check if terminal voltage of set I 24V is normal.
(2) Check if output voltage of secondary wrings of synchronization transformer is
normal.
(3) Check if 24V output of set I 24V is normal, may be switch power failure, change
9-19

it.
10. DC 24V II section disappearance
Conditions:
Generator voltage is higher 80% rated voltage and regulator set II 24V disappear.
(1) Display on the regulation displays DC 24V II section disappearance.
(2) Output contacts DC 24V II section disappearance will contact on the
(1) Check if terminal voltage of set II 24V is normal.
(2) Check if 24V output of set I 24V is normal, may be switch power failure, change
it.
11. AC power disappearance
Conditions:
Plant power set I&II disappear.
(1) Display on the regulation displays AC disappearance.
(2) Output contacts AC disappearance will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(1) Check if all the AC breakers in plant power supply circuit are switched on.
(2) Check if AC relative contacter is operated.
(3) Check if external plant power is normal.
12.DC disappear
Conditions:
DC setIorII disappear.
(1) Display on the regulation displays DC disappearance.
(2) Output contacts DC disappearance will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(1) Check if external output DC power is normal at external wiring terminals.
9-20

(2) Check if 220V DC at voltage external wiring terminals of fuse or breaker in DC
power circuit.
13. Field circuit breaker Mis-opening
Conditions:
When networking of generator holdsand Field circuit breaker break down.
(1) Display on the regulation displays Field circuit breaker Mis-opening .
(2) Output contacts DC disappearance will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(1) Check if breaker at generator exit is ON.
(2) Check if field circuit breaker is OFF.
14. Overexcitation protection
Conditions:
Excitation current measured on analogue quantity board bigger overexcitation
protection value.
(1) Display on the regulation displays Field circuit breaker Mis-opening .
(2) Output contacts Overexcitation protection will contact on the Intelligentized I/O
board.
Overexcitation protection relay K04 will operate, output contacts send signal or stop.
(1) Check if there is short circuit in rotor circuit.
(2) Check if there is short circuit in the recitifier.
15. Over voltage protection operation
Conditions:
(1) Non-balanced phase operation brings over voltage protection operation in rotor
circuit.
(2) When field circuit breaker operation and de-excitation.
9-21

(1) Display on the regulation displays Over voltage protection operation .
(2) Output contacts Over voltage protection operation will contact on the
(3) Display on the intelligentized board of de-exciter displays , or signal light lights.
Regulator will cutoff A phase pulse signal.
(1) When break down field circuit breaker is normal because of some cause.
(2) When generator sets work in non-balanced phase, overvoltage will come out and
is normal.
16. A/B synchronization failure
Conditions:
Generator voltage is higher 40%, A/B synchronization voltage higher 20%, but lower
0.85 times A/B PT voltage.
(1) Display on the regulation displays setA/B synchronization failure .
(2) Output contacts setA/B synchronization failure will contact on the
(3) A/B will automatically switch to the standby channel.
(4) If contact JP1 jump on the switch quantity board, protection relay K04 will
operate.
Check A/B if 3-phase synchronization voltage is normal.
17.Underexcitation
Conditions:
When it is working by A/B channel: generator current is higher 10% excitation
current, and lower 20% no-loaded excitation current.
(1) Display on the regulation displays underexcitation .
(2) Output contacts underexcitation will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(3) If contact JP1 jump on the switch quantity board, protection relay K04 will
9-22

operate.
(4) There is underexcitation when it is operating in working channel.
Regulator working channel failure or excitation system failure brings generator loss
excitation current. Hanld: switch to standby channel and check if regulator is normal
working.
18.Excitation transformer CT failure
Conditions:
When it is working by A/B channel: generator voltage is higher 80%, excitation
current lower 10% rated current, and synchronization voltage parameter unequal to 0.
(1) Display on the regulation displays Excitation transformer CT failure .
(2) Output contacts Excitation transformer CT failure will contact on the
(1) Check if C channel control signal is normal. When excitation transformer CT
failure, C channel current feedback signal will be small.
(2) Check if excitation transformer CT circuit is normal.
19. Communication failures
Conditions:
Including A Regulator Communication failure, B Regulator Communication failure,
(2#3#4#) rectifier Communication failure, de-exciter Communication failure,
Intelligent I/O Panel Communication failure etc.
Display on the regulation displays Communication failures.
Output contacts Communication failures will contact on the Intelligentized I/O
board.
20.(2#3#4#) rectifier cubicle fan power failure
Conditions:
There is R651 command or starting fan command.
9-23

(1) Display on the regulation displays (2#3#4#) rectifier cubicle fan power
failure .
(2) Output contacts (2#3#4#) rectifier cubicle fan power failure will contact
on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(3) Display on the intelligentized board of rectifier displays(2#3#4#) rectifier
cubicle fan power failure and holds.
(1) Restrore on the screen of rectifier and check if (2#3#4#) rectifier cubicle
fan power failure signal disappear.
(2) Check if fan power circuit is normal.
(3) Check if fan stop or slow on the rectifier.
21.(2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle fast fuse blow
Conditions:
Any fuse on the intelligentized board of rectifier blow.
(1) Display on the regulation displays (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle fast
blow .
(2) Output contacts (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle fast
blow will
contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.

(3) Display on the intelligentized board of rectifier displays(2#, 3#, 4#)
rectifier cubicle fast
blow.

(1) Check if 6-fuse red director is out. If it is out , fuse is fail.
22. 1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle wind overtemperature
Conditions:
Wind temperature exceed prevalue on the rectifier.
(1) Display on the regulation displays 1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle wind
overtemperature.
9-24

(2) Output contacts 1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle wind overtemperature will
(3) Display on the intelligentized board of rectifier displays1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier
cubicle wind overtemperature.
(1) Measure if circumstance temperature is higher 40C.
(2) Check if output current and brige arm current of rectifier is overhigh.
(3) Check if fan stops. If it stops and other rectifier works normally, cutoff the pluse of
the rectifier. Check if fan power disappears or if fan stops.
23.1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier resistence and capacitance failure
Conditions:
Fuse direction contacts in the RC protection circuit of rectifier break.
(1) Display on the regulation displays 1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier resistence and
capacitance failure.
(2) Output contacts 1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier resistence and capacitance failure will
Display on the intelligentized board of rectifier displays1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier
resistence and capacitance failure.
If generator works normally, cutoff pulse of rectifier and stop working. Best check as
following processes:
(1) Check if commute diode in the RC circuit shortcircuit.
(2) Check if sorb capacitance break in the RC protection circuit.
24.1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle bridge arm current stop
Conditions:
When output current of rectifier is higher 200A and generator voltage higher 40%,
corresponding phase (+A, +B, +C, A, B, -C ) crystalloid current is lower preset
value. (generally 5A)
9-25

(1) Display on the regulation displays 1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle bridge arm
current stop.
(2) Output contacts 1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier cubicle bridge arm current stop will
(3) Display on the intelligentized board of rectifier displays1# (2#, 3#, 4#) rectifier
cubicle bridge arm current stop.
25.Rectifier is out
Conditions:
Rectifier pluse cutoff switch is ON.
(1) Display on the regulation displays Rectifier is out.
(2) Output contacts Rectifier is out will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(4) Display on the intelligentized board of rectifier displaysRectifier is out.
Check if pulse cutoff switch is in the condition of cutoff.
26. Commuter failure (corresponding to conventional rectifier)
Conditions:
When each failure comes out following:
(1) Fuse blow of rectifier.
(2) When startup command holds, fan power disappear of rectifier.
(3) Pulse board check pulse failure.
(1) Display on the regulation displays Commuter failure.
(2) Output contacts Commuter failure will contact on the Intelligentized I/O board.
(4) Fuse blow or fan stop light will be light on the door of rectifier.
(1) See if fuse blow,fan stop light is light, lighting means corrrsponding light
failure and check corresponding controlling and detecting circuit.
(2) If light is normal on the door of rectifier, it is maybe pulse failure. we can change
DK201board.
9-26
4.4 Technology consultation and server

If the fault can not be eliminated, call the following telephone for aid.
Technology Dept.: 08620-8419784484451171-522
Project Dept.: 020-84451171-268,227,
020-8418947;
Postcode: 510300
E-mail: lici@china-exciter.com
9-27
Users guideCommunication with the surveillance system
Chapter10 Communication with the

surveillance system
1.Setup of the communication interface ................................. 2
2.Communication agreement................................................... 2
2.1 read the system status............................................................ 2
2.2 Constant reactive power regulation of the preset value......... 3
2.3 Constant reactive power regulation of the current working
status ........................................................................................... 3
2.4 The constant reactive power regulation exits ........................ 4
2.5 The preset value enters the constant power coefficient......... 4
2.6 The current working status enters the constant power
coefficient ................................................................................... 4
2.7 Constant power coefficient exits ........................................... 5
2.8 Set value getting into time calibration................................... 5
2.9 Fixed value getting into time calibration............................... 5
2.10 Time value setting ............................................................... 6
2.11 Modbus communication order............................................. 6
2.12 Given reactive power value................................................. 6
2.13 Given power factor.............................................................. 7
3.Output status definition table for the excitation system..... 7
10-1

The interface connecting EXC9000 system and LCU monitoring system is flexible,
which might be the conventional relay contactor, and can be the communicative mode,
or the net combination through the BUS. Whats more, the above ways can be mixed.
Users can choose what ever they like.
In recent years, as the full development of excitation regulator, the connection with
the monitoring system has adopted the serial wiring way.
This system specially
develops an intelligent IO board and the special programmable chip, for the use of
handling the serial communication in the monitoring system.
According to the
current demand of power plants and monitoring system we develop the MODBUS
special program matching with the agreement. The hard ware of the interface is the
RS485 interface, advanced and suitable for long distance transportation.
1.Setup of the communication interface

The excitation system and the monitoring system adopt the Modbus communication
agreement. Our company supports the RTU mode. The setup out-of-factory as the
following:
The electric interface standard: RS485
Station No. 1
Communicative mode: RTU
Baud rate: 9600bit/s
Data bit: 8
Stop bit: 1
Check bit: no check
The station No., the baud rate, the stop bit, the check bit can be changed on the spot
2.Communication agreement
The agreements are:
2.1 read the system status

Command:
Station No
01
Function No.
03
Initial point
0000
10-2
Length
000A
CRC check bit

CRC16

Reaction format
Station No.
01
Register
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
Function No.
Data length
03
14
Definition
Excitation voltage
Excitation current
Rotor temperature
R0~R15
R16~R31
R32~R47
Data
16
16
16
16
16
16
Content of
Content of
0000
000A
XXXX
XXXX
Data range
0~XXXX
0~XXXX
0~XXXX
Switch
Switch
Switch
CRC check bit
CRC16
Actual
0~XX.XX
0`XX.XX
0~XX.XX
Remarks
Actual
Actual
Actual
0006
007
008
009
The definition of R0~R47 are detailed in this chapter 3.the definition of the output
status.
2.2 Constant reactive power regulation of the preset value

Write 1 in the 0000register, the excitation system would enter into the constant
reactive power regulation on condition. Conditions: whenever the system enters into
this state, the reactive power value should be reset or the command would be invalid.
Command:
Station No
01
Reaction format
Station No.
01
Function No. Initial point

05
0000
Function No.
05
Initial address
0000
Write 1
FF00
Write 1
FF00
CRC check
8C3A
CRC check bit

8C3A
2.3 Constant reactive power regulation of the current

working status
Write 1 in the 0001register, the excitation system would enter into the constant
reactive power regulation without conditions. Conditions: whenever the system enters
into this state, the reactive power value set as the current reactive power value.
10-3

Command:
Station No
01
Reaction format
Station No.
01
Function No.
05
Function No.
05
Initial point
0001
Initial address
0001
Write 1
FF00
Write 1
FF00
CRC check bit

DDFA
CRC check bit

DDFA
2.4 The constant reactive power regulation exits

Write 0 to the address 0000, the excitation system exit the reactive power
regulation.
Command:
Station No
01
Reaction format
Station No.
01
Initial point
0000
Write 0
0000
Initial address
0000
Write 0
0000
Function No.
05
Function No.
05
CRC check bit

CDCA
CRC check bit

CDCA
2.5 The preset value enters the constant power coefficient

Write 1 to address 0002, the excitation system would enter the running mode of
constant power coefficient. Before the operation, the power coefficient should be first
set, or the command would be invalid.
Command:
Station No
01
Reaction format
Station No.
01
Function No.
05
Function No.
05
Initial point
0002
Write 1
FF00
Initial address
0002
Write 1
FF00
CRC check bit

2DFA
CRC check bit

2DFA
2.6 The current working status enters the constant power

coefficient
Write 1 to the register 0003, the excitation system would enter the state of current
power regulation, the power coefficient being the current one
Command:
Station No
01
Function No.
05
Initial point
0003
10-4
Write 1
FF00
CRC check bit

7C3A

Reaction format
Station No.
01
Function No.
05
Initial address
0003
Write 1
FF00
CRC check bit

7C3A
2.7 Constant power coefficient exits

Write 0 to the address 0002, the excitation system would exit the state of constant
coefficient regulation.
Command:
Station No
Function No.
01
05
Reaction format
Station No.
01
Function No.
05
Initial point
0002
Write 0
0000
Initial address
0002
Write 0
0000
CRC check bit

CRC16
CRC check bit

CRC16
2.8 Set value getting into time calibration

Writing 1 into address 0004, excitation system will be able to carry out the time
checking function of set value. Premise: every time gets into the time checking
condition, it must be reset, otherwise the order is ineffective.
Order:
Station
01
Response:
Function
05
Original
0004
Write 1
FF00
16 digit CRC checking

CDFB
Station
01
Function
05
Original
0004
Write 1
FF00

CDFB
2.9 Fixed value getting into time calibration

Writing 1 into register 0005, excitation system will be able to carry out the time
checking function of fixed value. The fixed time is 08:00:00.
Order:
Station
01
Response:
Function
05
Original
0005
Write 1
FF00

9C3B
Station
01
Function
05
Original
0005
Write 1
FF00

9C3B
10-5
2.10 Time value setting

Write the 4digit hexadecimal number into address 0002, it is the set value of power
factor.
Order:
Station Function
01
06
Response:
Original
0002
Write 1
XX
Write
XX
16 digit CRC
CRC16
Station Function
Original
Write 1
Write
16 digit CRC
01
06
0002
XX
XX
CRC16
Number 1 is the hour set value; the scope of hexadecimal data is 0 to 17
Number 2 is the minute set value; the scope of hexadecimal data is 0 to 3B
The second set value is automatically 0 after every time setting.e.g. set time as
23:59, thus 0.
Order:
Station
01
Response:
Function
06
Original
0002
Write 1
17
Write
3B
16 digit CRC
6629
Station
01
Function
06
Original
0002
Write 1
17
Write
3B
16 digit CRC
6629
2.11 Modbus communication order

Write AA55 into register 0000
Order:
Station number
01
Response:
Function
08
Original
0000
Write 1
AA55

5E94
Station number
Function
Original
Write 1
01
08
0000
AA55
5E94
Remarks: this order is not the necessary order of excitation system.
2.12 Given reactive power value

Write the 4 digit hexadecimal number into address 0000, it is the reactive power set
value.
Order:
10-6

Station number
01
Response:
Function
06
Original
0000
Write
XXXX
16 digit CRC
CRC16
Station number Function

Original
Write
16 digit CRC
01
06
0000
XXXX
CRC16
The number is from 0 to 10000, the data type is integer, means 0100.00Sn.
According to Modbus agreement, it is prior to send the high-digits and inferior to send
the low-digits.
2.13 Given power factor

Write the 4 digit hexadecimal number into register 0001, it is the set value of power
factor.
Order:
Station number
01
Response
Function
06
Original
0001
Write
XXXX
16 digit CRC
CRC16
Station number Function

Original
Write
16 digit CRC
01
06
0001
XXXX
CRC16
The number is from 0 to 10000, the data type is integer, means 01.0000Sn. It is
prior to send the high-digits and inferior to send the low-digits.
3.Output status definition table for the excitation system

The definitions of R0~R47 provided for the monitoring system should be matched
with the actual position in the IO board rationale diagram. The intelligent IO
definition can be used to modify the definition of R0~R47 on the IIU.
The corresponding relationship of the definition position and the R0~R47
X1terminal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Corresponding Corresponding X6terminal

R0
R47
20
19
R1
R46
18
17
R2
R45
16
15
14
R3
R44
13
10-7

9
R4
R43
12
10
11
11
R5
R42
10
12
9
13
R6
R41
8
14
7
15
R7
R40
6
16
5
Attention: the definitions of R0~R47 provided for the engineers should be matched
with the actual position in the IO board rationale diagram with accuracy. If theres
modification in any of the R0~R47, the definition in the monitoring system should be
modified accordingly.
10-8
Users guideElectronic generation function
Chapter11 Electronic braking function

1.Brief introduction ......................................................................... 2
2.Rationale for the electric braking ............................................... 2
3.Circuit for electric braking .......................................................... 3
4.Working procedure of electric braking ...................................... 4
5.The output current control of the excitation system.................. 7
11-1
1.Brief introduction
Our company has a great knowledge and rich experience in the electric braking
device.
On the basis of the excitation system, taking the users needs into
consideration, we develop the function of electric braking from the soft ware, named
the soft electric braking.
This function of electric braking can only be applied to the water turbine.
2.Rationale for the electric braking

After the breaking of generator and de-excitation, when the spinning speed of the
machine drops to 50%~60%, operators short circuit3-phase the stator at the terminal
exit.
After a serious of logic operation, the power for electric braking is supplied.
The regulator turns to the electric braking mode and adds rotor current to the rotors.
Because the generator is spinning, the stators would create short-circuit current. The
moment direction is due opposite to the rotors inertance, playing the role of electric
braking.
There 2 main distinguished characteristics of electric braking:
(1) The electric braking moment is proportionate to the square current of the stator
short circuit.
(2) The electric braking moment is inverse proportionate to the spinning speed of the
machine unit. In the process of electric braking, the stator short circuit current
remains almost the same, so as the spinning speed drops, the electric braking
moment increases. When the machine units stop spinning, the moment reaches it
maximum value.
According to the above characteristics, in order to get the most moment, we should
make full use of the stator capacity to make the stator short circuit current equal to the
rated stator current. In order to get the rated stator current, the excitation current
should reach the 0-loaded generator excitation current.
The electric braking is generally started at the 60% of the rated spinning speed, the
command sent by the monitoring system. The PLC would finish the concrete steps of
electric braking procedure.
11-2
In the electric braking process, the regulator is in the manual mode. The excitation
system sends out the constant excitation current to the rotors.
The current set value can be set through the commissioning software.
3.Circuit for electric braking

In the process of electric braking, external power is needed, which is closely related
to the structure of the main circuit in the excitation system.
Generally there are 2
ways of wiring, see graph 11-1 and graph 11-2.
Graph 11-1 self and parallel wring mode
Graph 11-2 other-excitation wring mode
In the graph 11-1, the excitation equipments are wired in the way of self-parallel. If
there is short circuit, the whole circuit is powered off. The electric braking power
supply comes from a special electric braking voltage transformer; the power is from
the factory.
That is to say, in condition of generating and electric braking, the

11-3
rectifier power needs to be switched on and off through the QL1 and QL2.
In the graph 11-2, the wiring way is other-excitation wring. i.e. the voltage
transformer locates outside the circuit breaker in the generator. In conditions of
generating electricity or electric braking, the rectifier power is supplied by the
excitation change.
Compare the 2 ways, the way of graph 2 is simpler, which does
away with the voltage transformer and the circuit breaker, and thus with a more
concise logic.
Under the mode of self-parallel excitation of the generator, the excitation change is
generally originated from the generator terminal; in this way the way of graph one is
more popular. In the electric braking process, the excitation current provided to the
rotors from the system would not exceed the 0-loaded rated excitation current. As a
result, the capacity of the electric braking change can be selected at a small amount.
4.Working procedure of electric braking

The working procedure of electric braking is realized through PLC, which plays an
important role in the process of the whole procedure.
Take the graph 11-1 as an
example, to show the working procedure of electric braking.

PLC fulfills the following functions:
(1) Check the conditions for the electric braking to start
When it is normally stopped, the generator has some connection with the system,
the monitoring system sends out stop command to the regulator; the regulator would
reverse for de-excitation.
Generally speaking, when the following conditions are
met, the monitoring system sends out command of electric braking.

a) The circuit breaker at the generator exit switch off
b) The command of machine unit stop
c) The guide blades all closed
d) The machine units without accidents
e) The spinning speed drops to less than 60% of rated value
(2) When the conditions are met for the input of electric braking, the PLC locks the
relay protection, the switch QL1, and the switch RES, and the switch QL2.
11-4
(3) The excitation regulator transfer to the mode of electric braking so that the
excitation system send current to the rotors, forming a moment to finish the
electric braking process.
(4) In the process, if any step doesnt meet the requirement, the PLC would send
signals to begin mechanical brake as well as alarm to the monitoring system. The
electric braking function exits, and at the same time enter step 7.
(5) When the spinning speed of the rotors is less than 5%, the electric braking is
finished. The PLC sends de-excitation signals to the regulator, after the success of
de-excitation, enter step 7.
(6) Reversion failure, the PLC switch off the de-excitater, then enters the step 7.
(7) When steps3~steps 6 are finished, PLC sends signals to switches QL2, RES, and
QL1, the relay protector is released, the excitation system remains at the state
before it is normally turned on.
In the electric braking process, PLC has continuously monitored the normality of
this process. When met with the following problems, the PLC would send alarm
signal to the monitoring system, and exit the process. At this moment, the monitoring
system is input to finish the electric braking in the machine units.
a) QL1 could not be switched off, or RES, QL2 could not be switched on
b) The long period of electric braking.
11-5
11-6
5.The output current control of the excitation system

Considering the different running conditions of different power plants, in the
process of electric braking, the excitation current is not all the same. For the
convenience of regulating the current output, the parameter in the commissioning
software ID [91] can be modified, which is good for the regulation of on site current
needed for the circuit.
Channel C hasnt got the function of electric braking. If channel C is at work, the
electric braking command is started, the command of failure of electric braking would
be sent out.
11-7
Users guideDigital model and logic control
Chpter12 Digital model and logic control

1.Digital Model of Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) .............. 2
1.1 Block Diagram of Delivery Function.................................... 2
1.2 Brief Introduction.................................................................. 2
2.Digital Model of Power System Stability (PSS).......................... 3
2.1 Block Diagram of Delivery Function of PSS2A ................... 3
2.2 Brief Introduction of PSS2A................................................. 3
3.Controlling Logic of Automatic Voltage Regulate ..................... 5
4.Controlling Logic of Constant Excitation Current Regulate.... 6
5.Controlling Logic of Forced & Overexcitation Limit................ 7
6.Controlling Logic of Deviation Regulation & Underexcitation
Limit ................................................................................................. 7
7.Controlling Logic of V/Hz............................................................ 8
8.Controlling Logic of Signals Comprehensive Output............... 8
9.Controlling Logic of Power System Stability ............................. 9
10.Controlling Logic of Testing Simulation................................. 10
11.PT fault & synchronous Fault Test.......................................... 11
12.PPS Controlling Logic of Non-linear Robust ......................... 12
12-1
1.Digital Model of Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR)

1.1 Block Diagram of Delivery Function
1.2 Brief Introduction

All testing results are calculated by DSP samples, as time constants are equal,
expressed by TR.
Reactive compensation is regulated by KIR, active compensation is regulated by
KIA.
The main control has a link of two-stage outstrip and one delay, TA1, TA3 each is
outstrip time constant, TA2 and TA4 each is delay time constant. Stable increase is
regulated by KR While TA1=TA2=0, this link will out of use.
The phase-shifting scope of convert bridge is 10to 150,and the limit value of
excitation voltage can be calculated by rated positive voltage.
Parameter Setting
definition
TR
Brief introduction
Testing time constant
Unit
Scope
second 0.020
12-2
Typical
0.010

Ts
KIR
KIA
KR
TA2
TA4
Convert bridge time

Reactive compensation
Active compensation
Stable increase
First stage delay time
Second stage delay time
second
second
secon
0.004
-0.15+0.15
-0.15+0.15
101000
0<TA2TA1
TA4TA2
0.004
+0.06
0.00
200
0
4.0
TA1
TA3
Ufmax
Ufmin
constant
First outstrip time
Second outstrip time
Maximum excitation
Minimum excitation
second
second
02
0.0110
fixed
fixed
0
1.0
-0.9* Ufmax
2.Digital Model of Power System Stability (PSS)

2.1 Block Diagram of Delivery Function of PSS2A
2.2 Brief Introduction of PSS2A

While taking the model test, signals of PSS_0PSS_1PSS_2PSS_3PSS_4
PSS_5PSS_UK can be output by D/A.
Parameters with switch characteristic:
when TW2=0, this stopping direct current link will not be used.
12-3

when TW4=0, this stopping direct current link will not be used.
when TW1TW2=0, the total output of two polarized stopping direct
current link will always be 0.
when TW3TW4=0, the total output of two polarized stopping direct
current link will always be 0.
when T7=0, this stopping direct current link will not be used.
when T9=0, this stopping direct current link will not be used.
PSS2A parameter setting.
Definition
Brief introduction
Unit
Scope
Typical value
TW1,TW2 Stopping direct current time Second
0.130
TW1=2
constant
TW3,TW4 Gate control unit and
0.130
TW2=2
TW3=2
Second
Ks1
Ks2
PSS increase
Compensation factor of
0.150
0.015
Ks3
T1,T3
T2,T4
T7
electronic power integral

Signal match factor
outstrip time constant
Delay time constant
Electronic power integral
0.015
0.002.50
0.002.50
330
1
T1=
T2=
T8
T9
M
N
USTmax
USTmin
P1
P2
i
Wave trap time constant
Wave trap time constant
Wave trap order
Wave trap order
Positive limit
Negative limit
PSS input power
PSS quit power
0.002.50
0.002.50
25
12
0.010.2
0.010.2
0.10.9
0.10.9
0.00
0.10
1
0.1
- USTmax
0.4
0.35
Second
Second
Second
Second
Second
-
12-4
3.Controlling Logic of Automatic Voltage Regulate
12-5
4.Controlling Logic of Constant Excitation Current Regulate
12-6
5.Controlling Logic of Forced & Overexcitation Limit
6.Controlling
Logic
of
Deviation
Underexcitation Limit
12-7
Regulation
&
7.Controlling Logic of V/Hz
8.Controlling Logic of Signals Comprehensive Output
12-8
9.Controlling Logic of Power System Stability
12-9
10.Controlling Logic of Testing Simulation
12-10
11.PT fault & synchronous Fault Test
12-11
12.PPS Controlling Logic of Non-linear Robust
12-12

hệ thống kích từ trong nhà máy thủy điện

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

hệ thống kích từ trong nhà máy thủy điện

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EXC9000 STATIC EXCITATION

GUANGZHOU ELECTRICAL APARATUS

Users guideBrief introduction

Chapter 1 Brief introduction

Users guideBrief introduction

It can run in an entirely closed

Users guideBrief introduction

Associated with the 3-gorges sub-topic of

Users guideBrief introduction

Chapter 1 Brief introduction

Chapter 2 System composition

Chapter 3 Regulating software Function Illustrations

Chapter 4 Human-machine interface

Users guideBrief introduction

Chapter 5 Regulation software

Chapter 6 Installation guide

This chapter includes:

Users guideBrief introduction

Chapter 9 Maintenance and trouble shooting

Chapter 10 Communication with the SCADA system

Chapter 11 Electronic braking function

Chapter12 Regulator model and logic control

Users guideSystem composition

1. Models & Specifications ....................................................... 5

Users guideSystem composition

3.2.6 Analogue quantity board ........................................................24

3.3 Power supply.......................................................................... 48

Users guideSystem composition

4.1 Working mode of rectifier cubicle.......................................... 49

4.4 Pulse formation ...................................................................... 59

5. De-excitation and overvoltage protection ......................... 63

Users guideSystem composition

5.3.1.1 Definition for the wiring terminal and linkers on this

5.5 Conventional de-exciter ......................................................... 75

Users guideSystem composition

8.9 Grade of conducting wire ....................................................... 79

1. Models & Specifications

[1]: Number of excitation cubicles

Users guideSystem composition

Rates Output excitation Force

output No. of commuters

[11]: Modes of de-excitation resistor

Users guideSystem composition

circuit 1 Unit 80010002260

circuit excitation starting

2. System Block Diagram

Users guideSystem composition

Users guideSystem composition

structure is used which is composed of two automatic voltage-regulating channels (A

Both channel B and

Channel C is all the time automatically

something wrong, channel C would be automatically switched to for operation.

Collocation of Regulating Channels

Users guideSystem composition

3.2 Hardware of regulators

One CPU board

One DSP measuring board

One I/O board

One digital quantity BUS interface board

Diagram Hardware of the regulator

3.2.2 Automatic channel (A/B channel)

Users guideSystem composition

Automatic Channel Hardware Block Diagram

Users guideSystem composition